Digimon Adventure A Land of Monsters (Devimon Arc)

video|right|300px right|300px 
Digimon Adventure: A Land of Monsters (By Morgan Kingsley)
==Section heading==
This is the entire Devimon Arc. Will be posted one chapter at a time
Current amount of chapters posted so far: Finished
==Section heading==
Ages of the Digidestined
Oldest to Youngest
Joe: 18
Ken: 17
Matt: 16
Tai and Sora: 15
Izzy and Mimi: 14
T.K./Davis: 13
Yolei: 12
Cody: 10
Willis: 8
Kari: 7-8
----
PROLOGUE
It was the year 2018, in Odaiba, Japan.
In a house in this city, a forty-two year man was sitting in a chair. He was looking at a forty-six year man reading something. He had asked him to read something that he wrote. The man who wrote the story was a published author, writing of an adventure, while the reading was a good friend of the writer. When the reader was done, he put the book down, and looked at the man waiting. With his black glasses shining by the sunlight. This made him even more anxious.
"What's the result?" The man waiting asked.
"I'm sorry T.K." The man reading said. "But I really didn't like this as much as I really wanted. I wanted to LOVE it, but what I got was a decent story. Not terrible, but could have been better. I am more disappointed than anything." The man waiting, T.K., winched. He knew that was coming. He at least wanted to know why, first.
"Can you at least explain why, Joe," T.K. asked.
"I can start at any part of the story.' Joe replied. "First, how short these two stories were. They were both only fifty to fifty-four chapters. Then like three-hundred pages. I know that more chapters and pages can be made out of this. You know this, to. These stories being as long as they were, you barley described what was really happening to all of us. Then undertone how much this really affected us." Joe started, and T.K. knew this was true. He knew that he could have made the stories longer.
"What else was a problem to you?" T.K. asked Joe.
"Why did you make all of us so much younger than we really were? You made yourself eight. Izzy and Mimi ten. Matt, Tai, Sora eleven. Then you made me twelve. In the start. I mean, come on. Who are you going to fool here? We were each five or six years older than you wrote us to be, which was another big problem." Joe told T.K. That was another problem that T.K. should have thought about. "It's like you're trying to make a TV show. But I doubt that's really the case here, it just feels that way." He said, and T.K. insulted by the fact that Joe compared his writing to a TV show. This was the first time that T.K. heard somebody putting a story of his down in a matter like this. Besides, he can't remember everything that happened during these journeys, it would be impossible. Many things would be and are still left in the back of his mind to be sorted out.
"What was another big issue with the stories?" T.K. asked Joe.
"How you handled all of us in the stories. Tai was a brat who was mean to everybody around him. Matt was a punk that didn't really understand the true meaning of friendship. While this was the most true thing you held to the stories, it was still done horribly. It felt like me and Matt were the only ones important ones in the end of the first one. Sora was really important in the start, then became somebody in the background. You made it feel like she was the one being forced to deal with things her mother gave her. While it was the other way round, it was a part of how she grew in the digital world. Mimi was a Nagy little girl who nobody would like. You also wrote it so that Mimi had no purpose in the digital world. She did nothing in your writing! Nothing! You made me allergic to everything, which is very unrealistic. You also decreased how important I really was to the point were they would find me as a stereotypical nerd who is useless. While I was THE nerd, not Izzy, I wasn't useless. Why would you write me that way? You made so that I wasn't really important until the ending of the first story. Then you made it so that Izzy just spent hours doing stuff on his computer. That was pretty true, but not to the level you wrote it in. Really, T.K.? What was so wrong in telling the truth of what happened to you-know-who? It is going to be a insult to everybody." Joe was now obviously angry. T.K. found it more realistic, and didn't want to write of death unless if he had to. While Joe just wanted the truth and pure honesty in this writing. He wanted people to understand the load and burden that this place carried, not like it was just a walk in the park. As well as something that little kids could do. While T.K. thought he might be a little harsh, he understood why Joe is saying this.
"Because people might think of him the way he was described in the stories with a computer." T.K. tried explaining to Joe.
"I don't mind that you did that as much as like I said he did some stuff off of the computer. But, that did not bother me as much as not telling the one hundred percent truth. They are all is going to hate it!" Joe was now yelling, so that the entire household could hear. If anybody else was in it. Everybody in the residence was away at the moment.
"I wanted to tell people who read this story what the adventures in the digital world were like." T.K. said to Joe. Since everything else that he has done was a big hit, and everybody loved it. The digital world has given him many ideas and points of views that he even failed to see in great fantasy books such as Lord of the Rings. Not that T.K. is saying he's better than Tolkein himself or anything like that.
"While your attentions were noble, you did it not to the best of your possiblities. A lot of what you told was tell lies. While what you wrote from the first four or so chapters of us in the digital world was correct pretty much right on, you slowly going away after that. You changed everybody's personality, and made us all different than we were. That was another problem. This wasn't a child appropriate story. Remember my father? What about how mine and Matt's parents got divorced? What about Mimi's story that led her to semi-craziness? What about my and Matt's friendship? That was another big factor in what really happened. How it was bad, and how it grew to be strong in the end." T.K. knew all he wrote was something that made him hold back, and that was the main problem. And he hoped T.K. would not really comment on it. But he should have known better.
"Another thing." Joe started. "Why did you make Tai the narrator? You're not Tai, so all you put in with him was a guess. You don't know what was going on in his mind, and that is another reason he will hate it." T.K. looked down at his watch.
"The ending made no sense! Why did your give everybody the jobs they did? It barely describes them. You made me a doctor. The one thing I hate to do. Why did you leave my brother Jim out to? He had a future you know? But then you put in you-know-who. Why?" Joe asked. T.K. should have known that Jim's role in this was small in somewhat insulting. He should have given everybody a role, no matter how big or small, or no matter who they were.
"Because they would believe it." T.K. said.
"Wrong." Joe. said. "You're just too scared to write what happened! Know the difference." Joe was starting to lose his patience. This didn't happen a lot compared to people such as Matt or Tai.
"I just can't do it." T.K. tried explaining.
"You can't, or you won't do it?" Joe. asked. "Which is it?"
"I wasn't willing to do it." T.K. answered, ashamed. "You're right, Joe." T.K. put his head down.
"Your kids are away for the next two months. Mine are to, so that won't be a problem. I'm sure she would understand, so don't worry about how she would react." Joe told him.
"What are you indicating?" T.K. asked. Joe went to a drawer and put the books in there for possible reference. Then took out a few blue notebooks. All 120 sheet, three subject notebooks.
"Do you want to give this a second go?" Joe asked T.K. handing him the notebooks. Since he intended to tell it all, well, all that he remembered. Then he could help. They were a real team, after all.
"I do." He answered in words.
"The answer is simple. That thing you wrote was the first draft. The pre-game. Now it's time for the real story. What really happened. We can keep starting over until you are happy. We have two months, we can expand if we need to. That will just be when you will have to explain to them. You can live here while we are doing this. But now, we must tell the truth about everything. I can help, in fact, I will. I will explain it to you as best as I could. So please, forgive me if it takes a while for me to get into it." Joe told T.K.
"I like this idea? When do we start?' T.K. asked.
"We can start now." Joe answered. "Let's go and make our friends proud!" They sat down next to each other, and started writing everything they remembered down. This was from twenty-eight years ago. So they needed time. They kept on starting over every time they made a big mistake. That didn't matter. Joe had enough money to buy more notebooks if the two ran out.
----
CHAPTER 1: THE DAY BEFORE CAMP
A New World of Many Wonders
Chapter 1: The Day Before Camp
Hi, my name is Joe Kido, and I have blue hair. I am also Chinese; although I don't remember much of the place I am from. I live in a country named Japan. I have an older brother named Jim, and the two of us live with my father. (Let's never mention my mother. For she left us a long time ago, when I was three.)
The story I want to tell you begin during my senior year in high school. I was eighteen years old, if you can't do the math. I excelled in all my classes, so I could have all A's and get my father off my back. This story takes place in the year of 1990, if you wanted to know. On July 29th of that year, I went on a date. With a girl I had liked for about three years. I got the courage to ask her out one night, and she said yes. Although I don't understand why she would, I was not at all a popular guy at school. My brother helped me get ready for the date, by giving me a nice outfit to wear. My dad was proud of me for the first time in many years. My brother Jim and I were talking while I was getting my clothes ready.
"Jim, thanks for helping me with this." I said, as he buttoned my shirt up for me. I didn't want to ruin it or anything like that. "Tell me, how did you get Beth to go one a date with you?' I asked, wanting to bond with him a little.
"Joe, it took a while, and I was asking her for a year before she said yes. She is a nice girl; it's just I wonder if she doesn't want to be around me sometimes. Like when we are on a date or something. Don't worry Joe, that's just boyfriend and girlfriend paranoia. If you do go somewhere with Sarah, then you will feel the same way." Jim laughed a little bit, as he sat on the bed in my room. I was thinking about that to myself a little bit. I would admit, I didn't want to get that kind of paranoia. Jim was a good brother when he came through in the end.
"Thanks, Jim. I really like how you decided to help me with this when you didn't have to. It was very kind and thoughtful of you." I responded, and we just sat there, I had about half a hour before I was supposed to pick her up. So I had about ten minutes before she needed to be picked up really.
"Joe." Jim said, breaking our silence. "Whatever you do, don't let any food get on your clothes. That almost ruined my first date with Beth. Boy I was a messy eater back then." Jim said, and I knew it was true. He used to be really fat, and I would always have to help him do stuff. Now he's a fit, one hundred and fifty pound man. I was jealous of my brother. I had to admit. Everybody loved him, and nobody really cared much for me. I was the kind of nerd that even nerds would make fun of. That's pretty bad to think about.
"I will tell you how it went tomorrow when we can. You can be a real lifesaver sometimes. I will be heading out now, if you don't mind." I said, and I left the room. I took the car keys, and went down the stairs.
"Joe, tell me how the date went as soon as you come home tonight." I heard my father calling me right as I was about to head outside the door.
"Alright. I won't forget to do that." I responded, and sighed. I hoped this was going to go well, for my sake. I opened the door, wand walked outside. I also walked one step closer to the start of my journey.
It was freezing outside, but that really didn't matter. Since I was in the car anyways, and the place was inside a building. Naturally, it would be inside a building. I kept driving, thinking about how nice it was going to be. I didn't want to mess this up, since this might be my only chance to impress her.
I was ready at her house to pick her up at seven in the evening. Her name is Sarah, and she was a popular girl at school, but at least she wasn't snobby about it. That's why I was able to like her. She came outside and got in the passenger seat. "Hello, Joe," she smiled. "You look really nice today, well, nicer than you normally do." I laughed at this, because most people wouldn't take that as a compliment, but it's the nicest thing somebody had said to me in a very long time. "Joe, do you want to tell me where we are going?" Sarah asked, and I shook my head.
"That's one thing I can't tell you. That will ruin the surprise. I can tell you, however, that you look really nice today." I told her, and she smiled at my compliment. You know, since that's what they always like. I drove her to the most fancy restaurant in the town. My dad had given me a hundred dollars to reserve a table for two there. In return, he wanted to know how the date went after I came back.
"I have reserved a table for two here under the name of Joe Kido." The person with all the reservations looked down and nodded. He led us to our table. We put in our order. A waiter gave us our drinks, and came twenty minutes later with our food.
"Joe, why did you ask me to a date?' Sarah asked, kneeling a little closer to me. She was partly on the table, looking directly into me, and I knew I had to keep it together.
"Because I like you. I knew that this was my last year of High School. I liked you since you stopped that guy Travis from beating me up in the halls during freshmen year. That guy never bothered me after that. I feel a great gratitude towards that, and I hope you can respect this." She was in my grade, although I never asked her when her birthday was.
"Okay. I guess that is a good enough answer. Now onto my next question. How is your family like?" She asked, and I was getting anxious now.
"I have a older brother named Jim. He graduated two years ago, and is in college now. My father is a doctor, he is forty-two years old last time I checked. My mother left the three of us when I was just a little kid. I was only seven. Things have always been kind of rough since, but my dad makes his bills when they're due. Because of this, I have a nice place to live. No matter how our relationship may be, so I have to put up with him throughout whatever may happen." I answered her question, and it was my turn to ask her something. "How about you, how is your family like?"
"That's a easy one. My father works in the police force. My mother works at the bakery in town, actually. I am the only child, and when I graduate high School this year, I will be going right to college, to study and become a writer. This has been a passion that I've been going after for over six year now. I started this when I was eleven." Sarah responded. "What do you want to be when you grow up?' Sarah took me out of that thought.
"A doctor, to be the next in line for my family.' I answered, knowing that I had to lie to her. I didn't want to sound like a dumb dumb to her. She looked at me, and shook her head. She then got up, and looked at me closer.
"I don't think that is the real answer." Sarah told me. "I think you are only trying to become a doctor since your father wants you to, and you don't want to break his heart." She guessed. "I'm very good at reading emotions." She laughed, and I look down, might as well tell her the truth now.
"Yeah, you're right, I really don't want to be a doctor. I'm only doing it for his sake. The truth is, I don't know what I want in my life. I used to, but not anymore. I'm glad you know what you want though. I wanted to be a astrophysicist back when I was thirteen. But that was a long time ago now, and now I'm looking at the present. Now I see nothing." I said, and saw that almost a whole hour passed by between our interacting. As you might have guess, the whole time we talked, and she told me that I was a pretty cool person. Much cooler than anybody else made me out to be, and that they would just have to give me a chance. We ate our food, and everything went on really well for the rest of the night. I gave the waiter the hundred-dollar bill, just like my father told me to do. Now I had twenty dollars left, which he had said to give to him after the date was over. I drove Sarah back to her house where we talked for a little while.
"Hey Sarah, I had a good time. Want to go out again?" I awaited her response.
"Joe, I had a great time, too. You are honestly a great person, and you deserve to be everybody's friend. That's why I can't say yes, because I want you to be a friend, somebody I can trust. And if we started dating, we might break up and never trust each other again. But, will you at least be a friend?"
I agreed to this, because she was right. If we started dating, then we might never trust each other if we broke up. "Let's be friends," I said. We shook hands, and I drove back to my house. Before that, I saw her walk into her house, and she waved good-bye at me. I waved back. Don't worry Joe, I told myself. She gave me her number, and we could see each other in month from now.
My father wanted to know what had happened right away, as he requested from me right as I was heading out the door before the date.
"We decided that we wouldn't start dating. But we both agreed to remain friends." I hoped that my father would be fine with this response.
He wasn't, in fact, he slapped me right across the face. "You let a perfect girl get away! You had a chance, and now you might never be able to find anybody. If you come out before tomorrow, I will remove all your eating rights for a week!"
I ran to my room, and waited for him to go to sleep. I looked at my face in the mirror I had in my room. I saw the red mark as bright as possible. I was angry with him, and with myself. I went to a drawer, and took out a knife. I was about to do it, since I was such a failure. Then I stopped myself. Jim was in his room, writing something, but I don't know what it was exactly. But it wasn't any of my business what he was writing anyways.
"My adventures five years ago are still some of the most life changing experiences that I ever had. Understandably, but nobody knows about them aside form my companions. Zoe, Koji, Takuya, and Tommy. I can't believe I've never seen those little partners of ours since then, or that my life has gone by perfectly, or the fact that I got over Zoe by dating Beth. So many things that I would have never guess would happen did happen." Jim said to himself, and that confused me even more. "I used to go by the named J.P., but I don't anymore." He also said to himself, and I couldn't remember a time when he did that. I was in my room, thinking to myself. How did I not know this was going to happen? He'd been doing this to me since my mom left.
When I was convinced nobody was in the living room, I went out. Took the car keys, and left the house. I just needed to get out, maybe find a place for my head. Before I did that, however, I grabbed my phone. I might need that, just in case. I was also a great student at my grade, top of my class, and got offers for colleges all the time these days. I would come back to my house after I was done, put the keys back, and pretend nothing happened. I was looking at the streetlights, and the other cars blazing by through my window. I didn't know why I cared for that stuff, but I always found that a nice sight. That really hold true when it's nighttime. Also when I'm alone like this. I went to the gas station once, and pumped the car with the last twenty dollars that I had on me. That was a few gallons worth, and enough to fill the whole tank up. Then I started driving again with paying attention to anything but the street and driving even more. But without even realizing it, I drove for five hours without break. When I was really tired, I decided to stop and just sleep in the car for the night. Maybe drive back to my house when everybody was asleep the next night. Yeah, that's what I would do.
When I woke up, I noticed that it was 11 in the morning. There were a bunch of cars outside, near where I was. I got out and locked the door. I saw some stairs, and went up. Then, I saw some guy. When he noticed me, he walked in my direction.
"Hey, can we talk for a moment?" I nodded, and he led me to a house, a small one. With a table, small fridge, bathroom, shower, and a bed. The table had seats on both sides. He led me to one of them.
"My name is Eric. This is where I live. I am the head of this summer camp. How old are you, if you don't mind me asking?"
"Eighteen," I told him, and he nodded.
"Great, just what I need. Could you imagine being the leader of one of the houses? House six, to be exact. There are six other people there, all younger than you. Some in middle school, some in high school." He handed me seven folders. "There is a seventh, one for a man who wasn't able to show up to camp, but was supposed to." I wondered why this person didn't show up. I also wanted to know who these people were.
I looked at them. "Tai Kamiya, age 15 grade 9. Matt Ishida, age 16 grade 10. Mimi Tachikawa, age 14 grade 8." Sora Takenouchi, age 15 grade 9. Izzy Izumi, age 14 grade 8. And T.K. Ishida, age 13 grade 7." Then I looked at the last one "Ken Itthijouci, age 17 grade 11." I thought about it for a second. "Sure, sign me up for that house. Two questions, however. How long is this program? And why did Ken not show up?"
"It goes until the first day of school. And starts again on the first day of the second week of summer. It's been like that for the last twenty-one years, ever since I took over. But I live here year around, so I can get ready for the next year. As for Ken, didn't show up because on the starting day, he called and said he couldn't go. He said it had something to do with school and such. I think you can understand that. I could." He said, as he was walking me to the door. We shook hands.
I left, and went to find House Six. This way, at least, I was going to be able to stay away from my father for another four weeks. But neither I, nor anybody else in House Six knew, what was going to happen in the next twenty minutes. It would change our lives forever.
----
CHAPTER 2: AND SO IT BEGINS
I walked around the campground until I found a house with the number six on it. When I did, I went inside. There were six kids, as Eric had said there would be. One was short with a green shirt on and a green hat. He had blond hair, from what I could tell by the small amount that wasn't hidden by the hat. He wore some brown shorts, which almost covered up his entire legs. I was able to tell then that he was T.K., for he was clearly the youngest. It was interesting to see the little guy for the first time in four years. Since he last saw me, and vice versa when he was ten. After the time his parents got divorced. He was on the bed, looking ta the ceiling. He was throwing a hacky sack to the top, then to the bottom. He was taking a deep and heavy sigh, like you do when you're bored, and turned to his side.
Next to him was a taller, also blond-haired guy. He wore a green shirt, as well, but a much darker shade of it. He had on blue jeans, navy blue, I would say. His shoes were like the ones that surfers wear, and his eyes were a dark shade of blue. I was thinking that he might be the older brother, which then I knew was Matt. Since he was right next to me in the complex, and I was almost always aware of how he looked. From his afro in ninth grade, to him being nearly bald in tenth grade. From being short in sixth grade, to being tall in the eighth grade. I knew it all. He was cleaning his harmonica with a knife. The knife had a eagle edging on the hilt, and that made it look even cooler. He was getting the dirt off of it. When he did, he was looking at me while playing it.
I did have a pretty good idea on who Izzy was. He was the kid with the laptop and weighed more than everyone else. He had sort of blackish hair and was typing a message or so, perhaps to his parents. I wish my dad and I were able to get along that well. Then I told myself not to think about it. His shirt was a dirty orange, and he had brown gloves on. He had brown eyes and wore a brown pair of shorts, just like T.K.'s. Wonder why it would be the same. His hair was also brown. Wow, I thought, this kid has a lot of brown on him. Once the message was done being typed, he went off of it, and shut it down. Then he rubbed his eyes, and walked to his bed.
Close to him stood I another guy. He had goggles on. His hair was a horrible mess and incredibly spiky. He wore a dark blue shirt with sleeves that went all the way down to a little bit above his elbows. His pair of shorts was light brown, but a little closer to the white side. So not like Izzy's or T.K.'s. Around the wrist of his right arm, he wore a black thing. I was going to have to figure that one out someday. Maybe, he would tell me. He was Tai, as I would expect. He was kicking the soccer in the cabin back and forth between the wall. As if this was a game, sort of like Kick ball.
Next, I saw a girl wearing literally all pink. Like a pink hat, pink gloves, pink shirt, pink skirt, and pink socks. The only thing that wasn't pink were her boots, which were a weird combination of black and brown. Who knew those colors would go together, I thought to myself.. She was obviously Mimi, since she was the only person I knew who would do that. I knew for a fact that with her waving her blonde hair around without the hat, as well as how she is when I mentor her, that she was going to annoy the crap out of me. When she was done waving her hair for absolutely no reason at all, she put her hat back on. Be nice, I told myself. She's only the second or third youngest, and don't think of that.
Lastly, I saw a girl with a cap on. It was a blue hard cap that looked like it wouldn't break easily. She was wearing a dark yellow shirt and light blue jeans. Her gloves were also light blue. She was much more tanned than the other female and looked much cooler. I knew that she was Sora, since she was the only person I haven't figured out yet. She was looking at the bookshelf, and trying to pick something out. She did, although I wasn't able to see what it was, so I couldn't tell you. She sat on the chair near the wall, and begin reading. I sighed, and walked right into the house.
As I stepped into the house, I tripped, noticing I was still wearing my nice clothes and dress shoes. Not something for a summer camp. I got up, feeling slightly embarrassed. I looked around, to see what they were thinking. The girl with the blue cap looked at me, smiled, and started blushing. Everybody else, though, looked like they were going to laugh. Some did. Being mad at the people who did, I started speaking to stop them:
"While we are here, I will go over some rules. Because Eric assigned me to be the head of this house." I knew that my father would be proud of this. I needed to make him proud. "First, no staying up until after ten a clock. Second, Izzy, you are only allowed to use that laptop for about three hours a day. Third, don't come talk to me when I'm thinking to myself. Fourth, don't get into arguments with each other. I've already seen enough arguments to last me a lifetime. Lastly, don't try sneaking into other houses. If you want to go to other houses, just talk to me. Now, I need to go change out of these clothes from my date last night. By the way, my name's Joe." I went up to T.K., with Matt looking at me. He was giving me the evil glare, and I didn't understand why.
"Hey Joe. Do you want to see these?" T.K. went to his duffel bag, and pulled out a bunch of ribbons. All of which said 1st place, or winner of championships, the lowest of which being 3rd place. I looked at each one of them, and I counted at least ten of them.
"Where did you get these?" I asked, handing them back. T.K. gave me a look, that showed that he was going to say something impressive.
"I joined the Track team in seventh grade. I win at every single one of the races almost. With the exception of that one when I only got third place. I'm also a top student at my school, so not only am I a top student, but a top athlete. I got myself in pretty good shoes here." T.K. responded, looking at his New Balance shoes. Those normally last a pretty long time. Matt was still glaring at me, pretty much saying that he didn't even approve of me talking to T.K., even as I walked into the bathroom and changed into regular clothes that I had brought up from the car. White t-shirt. Different glasses, some that weren't as nice. Light brown shorts, little green puffy things around my elbows, the things that basketball players wear. And, lastly, something other than dress shoes, just a regular pair of New Balance running shoes. I also put on my green ring, which my mother had told me to keep when she left. It was for knowing that someday, I would find true love. That doesn't exist, however, or at least my father thinks so. I can't even remember how my mother looked like, no matter how hard I try. Was that how long ago it really was? I wonder if either Jim or my father noticed that I'm gone yet, and the car is missing to. I would be dead if my father saw me pull up four weeks from now, but I don't really care. That's four weeks form now.
I came out with everybody freaking out. I went to see what was going on, and then I saw it. It was snowing. In August. Everybody started playing in the snow a little bit, first T.K., then Matt. After that came Tai, then Sora, shivering, and Mimi joined in last. I walked over to them, talking to myself. "I thought that you kids would get me a summer cold, but this is even worse!" I ran after them, to say that we should just go back inside. I was even holding my hands out, to see f this was all real.
"This is weird. I never seen snow appear from August. That's almost unheard of. I wonder what kind of weather things are going on right now." Izzy said, inside the house. He wasn't really willing to go outside, since he didn't want anything to happen to his computer.
"This is even colder than a snow storm. What the heck is happening?" Sora asked, and I was too stunned. Some of the snow got in my glasses, and I had to rub them for a moment. Matt put his knife back, and was having his hand on T.K.'s shoulder.
"Maybe we should tell Erik about this. I mean, after all, we need to stay save no matter what may happen. I'm not going to let anything wrong happen to us right now. T.K., let's head back inside." Matt said, and T.K. looked at his much taller, but nit much older brother.
"Why can't we stay outside for a little bit longer? Then maybe we could beat up that prep Mimi in a game of snowballs. Besides, the last time I had snow in my area was when I was twelve. I could have some more time outside in it, wouldn't you agree?" T.K. responded, and I could see that Matt didn't really like the idea, but he went along with it.
"I wonder how Kari would be reacting if she saw this right now." Tai muttered under his breath, and I wondered who the heck she was. I mean, she wasn't on the list or anything, and I don't know anybody by that name. Maybe a relative.
"In moments like these, I want to be at my home. Then I could practice cheerleading and everything. That would be a total blast in comparison to this. And don't you know it's not nice to call people a prep T.K.? Why can't snow appear in like December, whens it's supposed to. I just want to be left alone." Mimi said, and I was already annoyed with her. Then I saw something in the sky.
"Guys, stop talking for just a moment. Look up there!" I said, getting their attention. But then the crazy thing happened. A green glowing light appeared. Little meteorite things or something of the sort came shooting down at us. I thought our lives were over until the smoke went away, and I saw that we were all alive. Then some devices flew out of the ground, seven of them, and we each grabbed one. And, just like that, we were taken away by a vortex.
Izzy was on the ground, and he felt uncomfortable. He opened his eyes, to see what had just happened. He was in a area that he wasn't all to familiar with. Something was on top of him, and he looked to see what it was. As soon as he saw it, he jumped up in surprise.
"What are you?" Izzy asked. It looked like a red bug, and had eyes that wee gray. Izzy wasn't a big fan of bugs, and only was around them at school because of the constant assignments that they had.
"My name is Tentomon. I am pleased to meet you for the first time. I am your partner." It said, and Izzy looked at it in confusion. Not only was it a bug, but a talking one as well. This was scaring him even more than normal.
"What do you mean by you're my partner? I don't think I ever singed up for this. Please explain where the heck I am. Because I honestly want to call some people on the camp right now." Izzy said, and Tentomon gave him a confused look.
"What is camp. What is calling of people. I never heard these terms before." Izzy jumped back when he heard that voice again.
"Stay away from me please. I don't want to be around you right now." Izzy told it, and Tentomon looked mad at his partner.
"Do you always treat people like this? I was just going to suggest that we find some of your friends. How is your computer?' Tentomon said, and Izzy instantly went to check what the computers condition was. It was surprisingly not that bad, although he expected the screen to be broken or something like that.
"Wait, did you just say that you knew the location of my campmates? If this is true, then show them to me. Then I might put some slight trust in you. Will that be enough of a deal for you now?' Izzy said, and gave Tentomon a look as if he didn't want anything to happen.
"I guess that will work for now." Tentomon agreed, and the two left that part of the forest. Their goal was to find the other kids before too long, and before anything crazy happens.
Tai was sleeping as well. He was thinking about camp, and hanging out with his friends. He was also thinking of home, and how he and his little sister Kari get along so well. Well, after she was six that is. After her illness that nearly cost Kari her own life. He never wanted her to get hurt after that moment, and told himself that he would protect her if he ever was allowed to. Then he heard something call his name, and he wondered what it was. So he opened his eyes to see what it was. He saw what he thought was a small dinosaur, and got a confused look on his face.
"Aren't dinosaurs dead?' Tai asked, and the dinosaur looked confused.
"I don't know what you're calling me. But for something better you may call me Agumon. I am your partner, and we are bond to meet each other someday. So I am pleased to do so." It said, and Tai didn't remember anything about a animal talking partner on the papers for summer camp.
"Wait, can I ask where am I? I don't remember this pleas form the years that I've been in camp." Tai said, and the Agumon looked even more confused.
"I don't know anything about any camp. But we are meant to meet and save the digital world together with your friends. I bet they all got their partners as well." Agumon said, and Tai saw Izzy walk out towards him.
"Tai, nice to see that I'm not the only with something like this. This creature bug thing called Tentomon says that it can help me find my friends. Well, I see you and I guess that counts as one.' Izzy told him, and Tai looked at Agumon, then back at him.
"This one calls itself Agumon. I wonder why they all have the 'mon' at the end of their names. It really makes no sense." Tai told his computer geek friend, and then they heard a loud noise.
"What was that?' Izzy asked, and Agumon was listening.
"Guys, quickly. We need to leave right now. It's a Kawagemon, and it's a bug that makes Tentomon look like a little caterpillar, if we don't leave, then we might be sliced in half." Agumon said, and Tai looked at Agumon.
"Wait, if we run away, then we won't know where to find any of the others." Tai said, and Tentomon looked at him.
"Would you rather risk never finding your friends again, or risk losing your own life? Besides, we can worry about finding the others in just a little bit. I know a place that we can hide from it for a little bit." Tentomon said, and Tai looked at Izzy.
"I guess that we better follow them for the time being. Besides, they might know what they're taking about." Izzy told him, and they ran after the two digimon. They were running across a big part of the forest, and Izzy tripped for a moment. Tai picked him up, and the two continued following the strange creatures. Then they reached a tree. Tai and Izzy stopped for a moment, not really trusting in what they were seeing.
"Guys, trust us for a moment. This is the only true way you can be safe." Both digimon said, and Tai started running towards the tree. Izzy was closely following him. Then the two ran inside the tree, and started panting for air. That was when they heard the same noise again, flying around them for a moment.
"We will be safe here. Just don't leave until you think it is absolutely safe." Tentomon said, Tai and Izzy obeyed.
Sora was looking around for somebody. She was having no luck. She was wanting to find Tai, her best friend. Maybe Matt, who was her consular. Perhaps Mimi, who was the only other female. Maybe even Joe, who she had started blushing with on the first moment she saw him. She didn't really want to think about that then. T.K. would also work. She knew right away that he was arguably the smartest of the group. The only reason Izzy might be ahead of him was the laptop that he had. That was why she didn't want to find Izzy, however. Since he might be too worried about what might be happening to his laptop, and that might affect the group, and her possibly. She was distracted when she heard a crackling noise in the forest. She turned around, and found this pink bird coming towards her.
"Hello Sora. My name is Biyomon, and a couple of your other friends have met their own partners by now. You are mine." The bird said. Sora wasn't going to freak out or anything like that, since she didn't have to. But she could be confused about it none of the less.
"May I ask how you already know me?" Sora said, thinking of a easy go in a conversation with a bird.
"I was destined to be your partner from the start. If you don't trust in me, then you can ask some of the other digimon and their human partners about it. I know that this may be crazy to hear and see, but I can help you out with it. Come on, maybe we can find some of your friends now." Biymon said. Then a loud noise, like red a flying red bug appeared.
"What was that? That's only something that you normally hear in movies." Sora said, and was mainly thinking about the kinds when big monsters were trying to take over the entire world. Or kill thousands of people because they have no clue on what they're doing.
"That's Kawagemon. I think he may have found some of your friends. If we follow that path, then we can find a friend of two of yours. What do you say?" Biyomon said, and Sora shrugged.
"I guess it might be worth a try. I mean, what can go wrong? Not like anybody's going to die, right." Sora said, and went along. When they were walking, Biyomon was talking. It felt as if Sora now had a sister of sorts, which was strange, since it was a bird.
"In here, digimon such as ourselves go along and do what they like. There are several villages around here that divide some of the different kinds. Such as the fact that my kind have one on this place. Maybe two or three days travel from here, nothing too bad. Is it like that at your place?' Biyomon said, and Sora thought about it. While she doesn't really know about villages still being on Earth, she guessed that cities and towns could count as to what this bird is talking about as well.
"Yeah, I guess there is. There are cities in earth, the pace I am from. Hundreds of them, just within the country I'm from alone. I mean, the world I live in is vast, and I could never travel around the whole thing, not even in my wildest dreams. No can do. But I bet in here, you can really go almost anywhere right?" Sora said, and soon they were upon the tree that Tai and Izzy were hiding in. The red bug was away for the moment, maybe trying to find something else to scare for the moment. Sora was looking around, and didn't really see anything or anybody.
"Sora, over here. Try this tree." Biyomon said, and Sora went to try it out. "Say something to it, if you get a response, then you are in luck. If not, then we will have to try something else out." Biyomon said, and decided that it might be worth a try.
"Hello. Is anybody in there?" Sora said, and she heard Tai and Izzy voice.
"Was that Sora?" Izzy said. Tai was muttering.
"Yeah, it is. I think we can go out now." Tai replied, and the two left the tree. That meant that Sora, Tai and Izzy were now reunited. Three of the seven. Only T.K., Matt, Mimi, and myself still needed to find them.
In another part of the woods, T.K. was sitting down on a rock. He was staring at this monster thing that was looking at him. He didn't really know what to say, so he decided to make small talk with it.
"What are you?" T.K. said, while moving his hands out, showing that he was talking to it. Since he wasn't sure of the things intelligence.
"My name is Patomon. How is it like only living with your mother? I bet Matt thinks it's strange only living with his dad, and not growing up fully with a mom." The creature thing said, and T.K. had no possible clue on how this thing already knew about his parents divorce.
"How did you already know about this? I never told you that. I also bet that nobody else I knew did as well." T.K. said, he wasn't really even going to bother questioning how it could talk. Since he had seen things that that in the movies already.
"I've known you since you were a kid, Takeru. You are no stranger to me, and if I am one to you. Does that make any sort of sense?" Patomon said, and T.K. guessed that it did. The thing was, nobody called him by his real name, Takeru. Not even his parent, or mom. He asked them to give him this nickname after the divorce, and they did.
"That does make sense. You would have to give me a harder question than that someday. But anyways, please don't call me Takeru. Call me by T.K., everybody else already does anyways. I would just prefer it." T.K. told Patomon, and he saw the sun getting a small bit lower. He guessed that it was around one thirty or two a clock by now. He even put one of his fingers up to the sun, and did the math. It was a little over one sixth past the top of the sky that he could see. One sixth of twelve was two, so it was just a little past two.
"I wonder how Matt's doing. I bet he is snoozing in another part of this forest. At my camp place, there is a forest right next to it, so I'm not surprised to see this place here. Heck, I'm not even surprised to see a talking creature right now, sounds fully normal to me. Do humans, such as myself sound fully normal to you?" T.K. asked Patomon, and the digimon thought about it.
"Well, since I said I already knew you in the first place. I guess that the answer is yes. It might be a little strange to see them in person, but they're normal to me." Patomon said, and T.K. nodded.
"Anyways, let's go find the others." T.K. said, and the two left that area. Soon afterwards, they found Tai, Izzy and Sora talking to each other next to a tree. T.K. also saw a few other of these creatures next to them, but they each looked different.
Matt was looking out at some water, throwing some rocks into it. He had woken up from passing out a little bit ago. He just wanted to be alone for a moment before he tried finding T.K. or anybody else. That was when he saw something walk up to him. It was a dog like thing. It didn't really scare Matt, even with the fact that it was standing up until it started speaking.
"Hello Matt, are you enjoying the nice breeze of the water? Are you enjoying seeing T.K. again after four years of being separated? I would enjoy seeing a relative if I saw them for the first time in four years." It said. "By the way, my name is Gabumon." Matt looked back, and talking standing dog thing.
"Okay, I was fine with a standing dog. But a standing and talking dog is just too much for me. Sorry, that's a no go for me." Matt told it. "By the way, who the heck gave you that name?" Gabumon brushed off the question about his name.
"We digimon get a certain name, and we are stuck to it. Not like you guys, when you are born and your parents chooses a name for you. We can show you around the digital world if you like. I think most of your group is in one place at the moment. If you want, I can show you them. I think T.K. is there to." Gabumon said.
"Anyways, I don't just see T.K. at this time. We see each other on our birthdays, so that's twice a year. So we've seen each other eight times since my parents separated." Matt said, and Gabumon gave a 'oh please' laugh.
"Eight times, out of like, what. Nearly 1500 days. That's barely over half a percent. You might have to do better than that to impress me." Gabumon said, and that angered Matt.
"Hey it's not like I can choose when I can see him again. My parents do that, it's out of my will. If the camp rules went by normal, T.K. would be in the middle school cabin. Since he's only in eighth grade, when you don't qualify for the house I am in. You have to be at least in ninth grade for that. But they asked him to let T.K. to be in that house, so I can keep tabs on him. Although you are right, it is hard to be reunited with him after all this time. Kind of hard to talk to him when it comes time. But we will handle it." Matt said, and Gabumon looked at his human protector.
"Well, can you make a request or something like that to see T.K. more often? I would do that normally, but I can't. Since I don't really have any siblings, so I can't really. I wonder if that giant red bug Kawagemon is still going around making problem right now. It would be bad is it was." Gabumon said, and Matt didn't even bother asking. That was when the two found the others, and that meant five were now reunited. Leaving just Mimi and myself to find our ways to them.
Meanwhile, I was alone somewhere in the bushes, where I was so unlucky to find my own creature or rather: it found me. It looked like some sort of fish thing. Great, I was allergic to seafood. It had something looking like a flame on its face. "I know about thee," it said. "We are friends now. Please, do not worry about thy father or brother. They are just fine. In fact, thou know that thy father is probably happier without thee around." I was mad for it claiming that it knew me, when it had no idea. I had lived a horrible life, full of abuse and even worst things. I put my hands up to my face, to hold back my temptation to scream at it. Why? Why can't I just stay away from my family and all references to it for just a few weeks? I could kill myself to end my misery, and I would. Soon, I told myself, maybe a few hours from now, when I was completely alone.
"Do not be suicidal. In just a year, thou will be old enough to move out of the house and begin thine own life. Thou do not have to become a doctor. Come on, we will discuss this later. Let's find thy friends." None of those kids were my friends. I had no friends. Besides Sarah, which I had just made last night. Who did this fish-like thing think it was? I followed it anyways; maybe it would lead me to somewhere useful.
When I reached everybody, Tai made the introductions.
Tai saw me, and clasped his hands together. "So my name is Tai. I live in a apartment complex at the city I live in." Then he glanced at Sora. "She is Sora. She is a good friend of mine. We go to the same school together." Then he looked over to Matt. "He is Matt. He's sort of a guy that likes being noticed by others. But don't let that fool you, he's kind of a lone wolf." Next, he looked at Izzy. "He's Izzy. Need anybody to help you on computer related things, he is your man." Tai had to try a little harder to look at T.K., but he just kneeled down instead. "He's T.K. Don't let his height fool you either, he's got more smarts to him than just about almost anybody here." Lastly he looked at me. "That's Joe, he's our new head of the house. I don't remember knowing him all to well, so I can't really say anything." Then the digimon looked at us, and thought t was their turn.
"We're digimon. Digital Monsters. We already given you guys most of our names. So we don't think we really have to do that part. Anyways, nice to meet you guys as a whole." They said, and I shook my head. There was one missing. It was Mimi, and she hasn't found her way here yet.
"Guys, there's Mimi. We have to find her now. Since we shown ourselves to each other. But we should save all other introductions for later." I said, and left for a moment. I then looked back. "Are you guys coming?" I said, and they did.
Mimi was wondering where we were, and she was sitting next to a talking plant she found. She didn't even bother commenting about it.
"So you say your name's Palmon?" Mimi said, and the talking plant nodded.
"That's right. That's my name, and we're supposed to be best friends and partners. Don't worry about finding the others just yet. We can be alone for a second." But Mimi shook her head, it wasn't that easy.
"I wish I could, but the answer's no. I can't survive out here alone with just a talking plant." That was when she heard a scream, and there was this giant flying bug coming towards her. Then we showed up, and Mimi was down on the ground. Matt was the one that got her up, and saved her.
"Are you okay, Mimi?" Matt said, and Mimi looked at him. She felt like she should thank him, but she also didn't know how. The bug was coming closer to us, and I was looking for a place to run. I had to do something here.
"Guys, over here." I said, and they ran after me. I took them to a cliff by accident. I was looking for other resources, but that was all I could find. We were stepping closer to the edge, and we were each getting worried. I thought we all lost hope, when the digimon came up with a plan.
"Maybe we could use our attacks to weaken it." Agumon suggested, and the bug was one step away from them. Even I couldn't help but looked away now. Then that was what they did. All of the digimon started breathing fire or using plant vines, or air bubbles, some with fish. But they were all doing something to defeat it. We all stood surprised, and I had to feel like we owned them something now. When we thought that they had won and save the day, the bug got back up, and used its claws to break a part of the cliff. Then we fell down it, and started screaming. Both the humans and the digmon were going down. Where any of us going to survive? I didn't really know.
----
CHAPTER 3: THE BIRTH OF GREYMON
I was looking around at everybody, to see what there faces were showing. Horror. I couldn't do anything about it, the people I was assigned to protect were all going to die. Not even twelve hours after I got the job. I frown at this. I can't accomplish anything. As a final prayer, I close my eyes. 'Please, I don't care if I end up in heaven or hell, but put me in the place I deserve. Even if it's a place of eternal punishment, I thought to myself. I opened my eyes when I heard Gomamons voice, calling for his fellow fish.
"I call upon the fish!" I looked down at the water, I hated the water, due to the fact that I couldn't swim. But I saw a bunch of fish gather at the water, so they could save us all. Crap, I was allergic to the fish, meaning that I was also allergic to seafood. I was the first one to land onto the fish, with the exception of Gomamon.
"Why don't thee all go to sleep. I will wake thou up when we find a good landing spot, but that might take a few hours." I nodded, and closed my eyes. The first time I ever slept on some in some fish, pretty crazy day.
-On my dream, I saw a mountain. On the top of the mountain, I saw a castle. The dream was zooming in closer on the castle. There was a huge hall in it, with a giant red carpet. I saw giant gargoyles, and some other things. The roof was very high up, and the hall way was nearly a hundred feet long. There was no light being made, and I could only see what was in it due to the throne at the end. On the throne looked like a giant devil like thing was sitting down. Just thinking about something. When I was closer to it, I saw that it was watching something through a bowl of water. It was of the seven of us, and something that was under the mountain itself. Something that looked like huge black gears.
"I see that the seven kids have arrived onto the digital world now. They are now in the game, and can't leave until they win or they die. I can also see that the black gears are making much good progress, I think that I am ready soon. I will just give them some extra time. My servants Daemon is training Etemon very well. Dragomon has the dark world under very close watch. Owikawa is on Earth, trying to pick a good one to join us, and he says that he think he has. It is that boy names Sam. Myotismon is recruiting digimon onto our ranks. Now I, the master am ready to send my greatest creations out onto the digital world. Now my world is ready, now my nation will begin soon." It said to itself, and touched the water. Then the gears started to go out of the mountain, and fly into the air. "Take over anything you see, don't be careful in what you pick." The gears started to go across anything that it found, and the sky got much darker because of it.-
I woke up, and noticed that almost a whole hour has passed already. How? Seven kids, there are seven people in this group, if I included myself. Could it be possible that it was talking about us? Never mind, it was probably just a coincidence. No, it couldn't be. I saw all seven of us in the image of the water. I saw and heard this thing talk like it was directing the subject towards us. We must have been the people that it was talking about. But why? What were we going to do that was a huge threat to anybody? We just showed up on here, and met these creatures. Aside from that, we've done nothing really taking note of.
Everybody was either asleep, or talking with someone else. The people who were asleep were Izzy, Matt, Tai, and Mimi. While the people who were awake were T.K. and Sora, they were to busy talking about there family's. Like Matt, and Sora's mother. I knew that they were having a good conversation, and knowing what kind of dream I had, I stayed awake.
"T.K., what do you remember what your dad is like?' Sora said, and T.K. didn't answer for a while.
"I remember that he works at a radio station. I also remember that he and mom got along really well, but I don't get why they divorced if they got along great. None of that makes any sort of sense to me." T.K. said, Sora was also silent.
"I don't know anything about my father really. My mom tells me that she had me when she was only twenty. That she met my father one night, and then found out that she was pregnant a little while later. Not trusting in the idea of abortion or giving a baby up for adoption, she dropped out of High School so I could be taken care of. My father was never there, and I grew up with her. Then I had my mother tell me once, and she always told me that there was this university that he was attending. Since that was all she knew about the guy, she didn't even know his name." Sora told him, and T.K. didn't really stay silent for very long.
"What is your mother like?" He asked, and Sora looked as if T.K. had touched her on a soft subject.
"My mother and I get along alright. There are cases when we can talk about just school things and our talks can go really well. It's just about a certain job talk that bothers me. She wants me to run the flower shop when I grow up. The problem is, that I don't want to. Then she comes up with this story that she has a huge illness, and might need to retire sometime in the next five years. The thing is, why would she come up with something like that when she's only thirty-five years old. God, I hate it when people lie to me." Sora answered, and T.K. gave her a face of disappointment.
"She's trying to open up to the fact that she needs you, and wants you by her side. I know that it may seem that since she is the mother, she needs to look after you. Well guess what Sora, you're fifteen, you can look after yourself now. You are old enough now to help yourself and your mom. While you might need your mothers support sometimes, if she is ill. By the way, I highly doubt that she is lying, but that means that you need to throw in your two cents for her. I know I may sound like a jerk, but I learned the hard way that sometimes the only way to get your point across is to be a jerk." T.K. said, and Sora looked offended.
"Are you saying what I think you're saying? You're seriously on my mothers side on this one. You don't even know her." Sora snapped, and T.K. kept calm.
"I'm being realistic Sora! My mother makes me eat eggs and stuff in the freezer that I have no clue how long it has been in there. My friends mother does more of that even if I just met them. But I feel that maybe I'm overthinking it and maybe she is a good mother we just need to sit down and talk." T.K. said, and looked away. This was showing that the conversation was now truly over.
I took off my ring to look at it. Sora looked at me for a brief moment, and she looked at the ring a bit. As if she never seen it before. No surprise, it's a rare type. I wanted to talk to my mother, maybe she would relate to me. I would at least want to know why she left my father, and made Jim and I grow up with only one parent. My father was a horrible parent, but I realize that he does have his good things to him and that he is the only one with a working job there. I think at least he and Jim get along decently well. In fact, he treats him amazingly. He always gives Jim exactly what he wants, but always gives me something I wanted when I don't want it anymore. I became so lost in this thought that I almost didn't hear what Gomamon had to say about us finally reaching a island. I put my ring in my pocket. We pulled up, and got off the fish one by one. The fish swam away, and we all settled down.
"What do you think we should do now?" Matt asked the whole group for some contributions.
"I think we should go back to where we started, so we might be able to find everybody else who is at the camp." I threw in my two cents on the matter.
"It could work if there was a way to get back up there. But considering that, we don't have a way to get back up there. So I think that we should just try to come up with a new idea." Matt said, and I groaned. Already, I was just in this job, and none of them were taking me seriously. Great, how am I going to last the next four weeks like this? I saw the faces of some of the people, and I saw that T.K. had a angry look at his face. I could tell right away that he was thinking about that conversation that he and Sora had. The one that I was obviously not supposed to hear, but I did anyways. I would agree with T.K., he was being very realistic. It just came off that Sora was just judging her mothers good intentions way too harshly. I hate it when people act like they have such a bad life and everything, when in reality, they have like one bad detail. Oh wow, maybe I'm actually acting like that.
"I would agree with Matt, I don't think that's exactly a good idea. Because of the giant red insect that we had to face earlier. Maybe it's waiting for us there still. I think we should just go around and hope that we could survive long enough to find everybody else at the camp. You probably won't know who they were, because you just showed up to camp today." I knew right away that Tai was referring to me. I also knew that he was meaning it in the don't worry kind of way. Everybody else agreed and started to this idea, and started walking away from me. Before they were all away, Sora looked back. She looked at me as if she was trying to figure me out. As if she knew I was being super secretive and she wanted to learn about it.
"What was that argument for anyways?" I asked, wanting to know really how and why it all started.
"Because of some things that I said, and he responded in saying that I truly didn't have it that bad in comparison. After hearing about him, I am starting to wonder, am I having the good life that I thought I never did?" She said, and shaking her head. "Thanks for asking. Already more than what most people would do if they saw something like this. This is one of the reasons that I think you would be a good camp consular." She told me, and left to catch up with the group. I sat down when everybody was away from me, with the exception of Gomamon.
"Come on Joe, let's go try to find everybody else in the group before 'tis to late." I looked down at the ground for a moment, and knew that he was right, and I got up.
"I'm surprised that somebody thinks that I can do a good job. She doesn't even know me, and this is the first real thing I said to her with her paying attention to it. I wonder what everybody else would think." I said, stopping to think for another moment.
"Joe, was there something that thou did wrong that made them not want to trust in thee?" Gomamon asked, and I thought about it. Maybe it was the way I introduced myself. Or the way that I came into the clearing sort of terrified. I showed it pretty well to, like how no person should have. Or the fact that I suggested a idea that now sounds even strange to me.
"Maybe I did say a few things wrong. I made some crazy rules as soon as I showed up, and they might have been a little too unrealistic. Because I never really talked with this Izzy kid much, so I don't know how he is on a laptop. So maybe saying no more than three hours a day was a little pushing it." I said, getting up, and I caught up to everybody in a matter of a couple minutes.
"Why didn't you guys wait for me?" I asked the others. Nobody looked back at me, and I felt very uncomfortable over this. Since normally when people are walking down a path or something, there was at least some level of conversation.
"Joe, is there anything you don't complain about?" Matt asked me. I close my eyes, not being able to handle that comment. It's bad enough I have to deal with this from teachers telling students to stop whining. But maybe Matt was right. Maybe I have been complaining a little too much.
"Matt, do you enjoy insulting me or something? Besides, I never noticed you doing this to me when we were just living right next to each other. So what gives you such the strong urge to do so right now? I mean, I literally haven't done anything towards you in particular to get these kinds of insults. Or are you mad that I showed up randomly, without intending on doing so, and took your job that I didn't even want? Is that it, if so, then grow up, since I have to deal with something that I don't really want either." I told him, and instantly regretted it. I meant it but maybe I was taking it way too far. That's when we saw a bunch of phone booths, and everybody ran towards them. They started to call a different set of numbers.
"Mom, dad, are you back from visiting grandma yet? There is this really strange thing going on right now, and I need your or somebody's help." Tai said, and the phone beeped, showing that it was time for him to hang up.
"Mom, I'm sorry for the fight that we had before I headed out. Somebody tried talking some sense into me. I don't know if I understand yet, but considering something that is going on right now, I want us to at least make up for that." Sora said, and she hung up form her part of the phone.
"Just want to say, goodbye before I might be forced to hang. Hope I will see you soon." Izzy said, and sat down away form the phones. T.K., I noticed didn't call his mother or anything.
"I wouldn't want to talk to my mother, she doesn't deserve me to worry about her. I know she doesn't worry about me." He told us, and we just let him sit down, and he laid down with his hat on his head.
"Dad, I know you're at work right now. Just wanted to call you from a phone that I'm using right now. Nothing really big and important, just to say hi. Well, talk to you soon." Matt spoke into the phone, and hung up. He had a serious look on his face that even I never saw on him before.
"Mommy, daddy, just wanted to say that I love you. Will you call back if you have the time? Anyways, is there any body that looks interesting? How about some clothes that seem like they would be good or cool on me." Mimi said, and danced along to the circle that everybody else formed. T.K. gave her a aggravated look.
When everybody gave up, I tried to do some calls by myself. "Hey Jim, I know I'm away right now. But I got stuck at this summer camp with six kids, and I got sucked into this weird place. I know that it sounds impossible, but it did happen." I spoke into the muffled speaker, hoping that at least some of it made sense. I didn't want to call my dad for many reasons. Mainly due to the fact that he would then know that I'm gone. I wouldn't want to do that, wouldn't I? Everyone was sitting down, ready to eat. Izzy asks out loud.
"Does Joe always act like this?" Matt gave an answer that I should have predicted.
"Every single day." Why does Matt want to be so mean to me?
"He's not all that bad of a guy. I mean, he's doing his best. And he just showed up, give him a little bit of a break." Tai and Sora were both saying. I kept calling, not even listening to what they were saying. Mimi had a bunch of camping trip necessities in her pack. Who would have guessed that such a annoying girl would have that with her. I knew who she was, she goes to school with me. Although she was a few years younger than me, but her popularity makes her noticeable even to the seniors. She is a part of the cheer- leading club, and shows up to every one of the school games. Nobody tried to make a move on her before, because of all her expectations. I knew that she was only being a part of the popular group for the sake of popularity.
T.K. was walking to the shore, and thinking of taking a dive in it. He held his left hand out as if he were holding something but I didn't see it.
"Would you guys mind if I do?' T.K. asked, I waved in his direction, showing that I was personally fine with it.
"No T.K., we don't want to see you take your clothes off so you can bathe." Mimi said, and T.K. rolled his eyes.
"You know, my mom requires me to bathe twice a day. Once when I wake up, and after I come home from track practice. She wants me to keep this habit up, so I wouldn't be tempted to break it or anything. Besides, she's my mom, and I have to respect some of her wishes." T.K. told Mimi, and Mimi groaned in response.
"Is there anything that you do that doesn't have anything to do with what you mom want?' Mimi asked.
"Quite a bit, actually. I hang out with my friends without her saying so. I also do track without her saying so, I just do that one shower rule that she has. I also do my homework without her saying so. So leave me alone Mimi." T.K. told her to pretty much go away in that. Sora looked like she didn't really even care.
"Let him take a bathe if he wants. He doesn't want to smell bad or anything, respect that." Sora told Mimi, and she huffed at Sora's agreeing of this. I looked at them, and told them to be quiet for a second.
"You know it's rude to talk in the back ground when somebody is talking on the phone? I thought you guys learned that in like second grade." I said, sounding kind of rude, even to myself. They would have continued to take badly about me, if Tai didn't notice my medical bag on me. I took it from my house when I left last night. He called me over, and showed him everything that I had had in my medical bag.
"Okay, let's take turns at who carries this bag. We would switch every two days. I will go first, and the day after tomorrow, Mimi will take the bag. Look here, I have a few food items, and some bandages here. I got this form my house before I left. One of the few things that my father does right." I said, looking at everything. "Just the simple protein bars and everything. As well as the duck tape, although I don't know what this would be used for. I see some alcohol, which I can kind of see the use for it. You know, when somebody gets really hurt, and you pour it on the wound. There is also some of that cast thing that you can put on somebody for a quick job that can last a couple days. I think this is good enough for now,
"Oh, but I don't want all that strain on my back." Mimi was starting to make up excuses about why she wouldn't carry the bag.
"Why don't you just take some responsibility every once in a while, stop talking about cheer leading camp, and do what people ask you to do!?" That's when I got interrupted by a giant sea monster.
"Great, I'm allergic to seafood too!" I yelled, and tried to climb up a cliff. A useful skill that I developed trying to run away from my dad. The sea monster shoot water at me, and I fell down to the ground. Crack! Crap, that was my back most likely breaking. Matt was the first to fun up to me and he looked worried about something. Maybe I was wrong and he didn't hate me.
"Joe, don't worry. I will be here to help you get over this." Matt told me, and I couldn't get over it. I sort of held it together since I knew that Tai was having it worse than me. That sea monster was grabbing him and he looked terrible.
"Why does it has its grip so strong. I want to get out of this. Somebody help me please!" Tai screamed, and nobody was able to do anything but stare with surprise. That's when Agumon yelled for Tai to be saved, and Tai's device that he got earlier glowed. Some bright light surrounded Agumon.
"Agumon digivolved to... GREYMON!" The device stoped glowing. A even bigger dinosaur appeared, it was able to shot out a even bigger flame than it was able to before.
"Novablast!" Greymon shouted. He shoot one flame to the sea monster, before it was able to do anything about it, and it flew away into the water. Greymon went back to Agumon.
"We won! I think it's proper time to have a meal." Izzy said. He looked into the back pack and pulled out some food. Everybody was about to start eating. I then said out loud.
"I don't need anything to eat. My father wouldn't approve of it." I was barely able to get up with a problem. I started to groan just a little bit.. We decided to spend the night on the beach, where we were already at.
Why am I even here? I am just a burden to everybody here, just look at them. Everybody has already stated that they're not wanting me around. But I have a job to do. It's hard to talk to these people honestly. Maybe if I keep it hidden and only speak to them bits and pieces and one at a time it will be better for me.
----
CHAPTER 4: GARURUMON
The next day, we got our things off of the beach. I didn't eat dinner or breakfast, because I knew that my father wouldn't allow me to do that. I could go days or even weeks without eating if I had to.
"Joe, you know eating is right for you?" Tai said, and I nodded.
"Just not hungry really." I lied, and I felt guilty over doing it. But I didn't want to give my real reason, or else everybody will think that it was very childish of me. But I doubt they knew, no I wonder. Maybe it was possible that one of them might have an idea.
"It's kind of silly to not eat because you don't feel hungry." Tai told me, and I would agree to that. Sora walked up to me.
"Tai's right. You need to eat at least something. You haven't eaten once since you have shown up here." Sora put her two cents in, getting a little peachy check. I looked at her, and she walked off.
"I think it would be a good time for us to head out now." I said, and we all got up.
"Hey Agumon, why did you go back to this stage. You could just stay at Greymon." Tai asked his digimon partner. While we were walking up a steep hill. I was getting kind of tired, and I could see that the others were to.
"That is because when we finish what have to do to save went into our partners, than we go back to our rookie forms. That is what we call ourselves. What I just turned into is what you would call a champion digimon. That is the highest stage that we could go to that we know of. Heard rumor about a even higher level, but I never seen anything like it. So I will put these rumors to rest. But I wouldn't really worry about it if I were you." I was listening to what Agumon was saying, and I already had a question to ask him.
"So if you can go into something called champions, then why were you the only one who was able to advance? And do you know what you would turn into?" Agumon looked up in my direction.
"Because Tai was the one in the most danger, and so it was I. We also don't know exactly what we would turn into. It's a complete surprise for us as much as it is for you For all we know, Tentomon could become a giant rhino. Or Gomamon could become a satellite." I nodded, and noticed some bigger digimon bashing at each other. I was laughing on the inside when I heard about Gomamon possibly becoming a satellite. It just seemed silly, but in a place like this, from what I could see, that could very well be possible.
"Everybody, run behind me!" I led them out of the way, and we were saved. We watched that one and another one of its kind fighting, kind of like bears or other creatures when they are fighting for a mate. "What were they?" They were fighting for a few seconds longer, but they stopped after a little over three or four minutes. The fight didn't get brutal or anything, just really them bashing their horns in together.
"Those were Monochromon. They never fight with anything besides others of themselves." Gabumon was telling everybody. "I never seen them in action honestly, and it's kind of exciting actually. I mean, I've heard of it before, but it's almost just like a amazing piece of artwork, when you truly have to see it in order to really believe that it exists." Gabumon said, and I wouldn't exactly know if I would agree to that. I don't know if I would call watching two things fight really exciting. I guess one reason is because I had so much experience with fighting from ten, almost eleven years of my dad and I doing it almost every week. I rubbed my hand on the rock, and felt the grass on it. Just like normal Earth grass on rock, it felt real. Everything about this place falt real, that was the problem to me. I didn't know if this place was truly real or not, but it all felt it. I wonder how many people would agree with me, but I didn't dare ask. After all the stuff that happened yesterday.
"Come on guys, let's go on a little further for today, and hopefully we could find a good place to spend the night at. But then again, knowing our luck so far, we probably won't" Matt said, and glared at me in a get out of here sort of way. Not having any sort of better idea, we all agreed to this. We walked around inside the forest a little bit, and found nothing so far. Tai was getting anxious. Almost like he was expecting something really awful to happen any second now. I wonder why he was acting like this. I mean, even I wasn't acting that anxious over this, and I thought I was doing it pretty badly. You never know with this kind of stuff, do you really?
"Can't we just get out of the forest and find something closer to the shore. Maybe we would have more luck if we tried to do that anyways." He asked us in a very tired way. How could he be tired, we woke up maybe a hour ago, I think to myself. There was no way that a star jock like Tai Kamiya was getting tired after one hour of walking. Three or four hours I can buy, but this seemed kind of unreal. Maybe I was setting my standards a little too high. I mean, I never really done sports before, so I can't really know when somebody can reach their peak. But I heard before that people have to go beyond their peak, so their peak could be higher. Then they could become better I was no expert in sports, but as I said, I heard a coach say that once before. I always thought of it that way since.
"Let's just walk around a little longer, it all depends on what we find." I said, and we all agreed to this. Even Matt. Who gave up the fight when he saw everybody else. I had the feeling that even if somebody else said it, he would agree to it. Just something about me was getting him angry. I don't even know what it really was, maybe the fact that I replaced him as head. Which would be very childish if he as treating me like this over that. He knows that id Ken showed up, he would have been in his place of head camper. Since it was over age, and not really anything else. Meaning that despite T.K. having lots of potential from what I heard, he wouldn't be head for another three or four years. No wait, if he was in a middle school house he could be the head for a year or two. Anyways, we walked around for what was maybe another hour or so, until we got out of the forest. There we saw a trolley car.
"Hey guys, I see a trolley car over there!" Sora yelled to us all, and we ran towards it. Everybody got inside; I went to the drivers seat. Trying to figure out a way to start the car. Because if I manage to do so, then we might be able to find the other campers we have had no luck on finding anybody in the last two days we've been looking. I tried pressing a button, and a loud roaring noise was made.
"Wrong button." I whispered to myself. "Maybe this one." It was a blue button, the size of the tip of my thumb. I pressed it, and no noise was made. So either that button had no purpose, something failed once again, or I succeeded. I went out of the car to see if I made it work out or not I went to the trunk, and opened it. There was nothing inside. I opened the hood, and saw the normal batteries in it and everything. Most people wouldn't expect it, but I was a huge expert on cars. There was nothing wrong with it. Who knows, maybe this car just can't run normally. Maybe it just died, due to very old age or something. I went to see everybody else minding their own business in the car, not really paying any mind to other things.
"Everybody." I started. "If I can find a way to start up this car, then we could find everybody else faster. But I think that we should stay here for the night. So how about we go around and get our things ready for the night. Such as firewood, food for you guys of course, and something that might make us warm tonight. Like a blanket or something like that." I said what I think I needed to say. Then again, I should have known better. I mean, I just tried to fix it, and that didn't work, so I guess that there was nothing else really to do.
"I will go with Joe over to the forest to find some of the logs that we can use." Sora suggested, and I nodded. Not really knowing what else to think. Sora and I decided that we were to be the ones to get the firewood. Our best bet was inside the forest.
"So Sora, are you the only child in your family?" I asked, trying to make small talk. Since there was nothing else really to do. She glanced over at me briefly.
"Yes, my mother owns a flower shop. My father goes round the country to do some research. I'm not Japanese, to be honest." I felt glad that someone else was also from a foreign country. I wondered what the country was though. But I decided to say some stuff about myself first, then I would ask her.
"I have a older brother who's two years older than me. Making him twenty years old. My mother left my family when I was seven years old. I would rather not talk about my father." My right hand was in my pocket, toying with my ring. But I decide not to put it one. I was thinking, what else could I say? Maybe tell her where I was from. 'Where are you from. I'm from China, but moved here when I was three years old."
"You're eighteen. That's two years older than myself." Sora told me, but I already had this fact down in my head. Considering the information that Eric gave me when I showed up.
"I know, I read your file that Eric gave to me when I became the head of House six." She glances at me, and blushes very hard. I wonder what this is. I mean, I know my dad who beats me up, and his face gets red a lot. So my general reaction is that she is mad at me. Maybe I was mean with my delivery of Eric and how I knew this stuff.
"Sorry. I'm from Russia, which was actually a European country despite it being mostly in Asia." Sora says, trying to stop blushing. Why is she blushing so much at me? This was all to confusing. I mean, I just asked this to myself, but still.
"Hey look, I think I got something here." I told her, and found some logs. I went over to them, and grabbed about four of five with my hands. People say I was also a lot stringer than I look, but I never really cared. Much less paid that much attention to that stuff. We found some wood that we could use to start the fire with. That's when we decided to go back to everybody else at the trolley car. They were still getting something ready for the night. T.K. was finding some fish for us to have. Matt was getting the stick ready, so we could put the fishes on them. Giving us a way to cook it without needing a pan or pot. Tai was finding something sharp that could be used for us to make the fire with. You know, to scrap the wood against. Izzy was getting water that we could use, like to put them in just in case if Matts plan of stick failed. Mimi was just sitting around, not really doing anything.
"Mimi, we could use your help. Even if it's just grabbing one of the logs from Joe or Sora, that's at least a start." Matt told her, and I felt glad that he was stepping in a little bit for me. Since he also saw how much she was just slacking around here.
"Oh, but my clothes would get all dirty." Mimi reminded him.
'You know what Mimi, as second head of the house, and still head when Joe is not in the area, you must listen to me. As your senior.' Matt reasoned with her. While I saw that Matt was being a problem with me the last couple days, he was pulling through on this case. Mimi did come and help Sora and I get the wood back. Not soon after, we were all ready, and I started the fire. Matt cooked all of the food, and gave some to everybody. Besides me, but I was fine with that.
"Matt, do we still have forks here?" T.K. asked, this might be the first thing I heard him say the whole time we were here. He was just trying to be polite, and not come off as a slob to everybody else in the group.
"Don't worry about how you eat, you're one of the big boys now. I do it all the time when dad isn't around to put me down about it. Since he doesn't approve of me pretty much eating like a caveman. But I don't mind" T.K. looked unexcited about this. But seeing as he really had other choice but to do that, he started to dig in. I walked some distance away from them, and looked up at the sky. I put my hands together, since I normally think that this would help for some reason. As if I was squinting, and looking at one star at a time. To find where we could possibly be. Sora came up to me.
"Hey Joe, what are you doing?" She asked, and I looked over to where she was.
"I'm looking up at the stars. Since I know every single constellation in the sky, I could be able to find where we are in the world. It took me years to do it, but I eventually did. I spend many hours a day trying to learn about things I never knew about before hand. It's the only way I can truly feel like I'm doing something right." I scratched my hand, getting some sand of the beach out of my hair. Then it wall went to the ground. I shrugged it off, and moved on. While looking up, and not really even caring about keeping conversation with Sora anymore, Tai came up to us.
"Maybe we aren't even in Japan anymore. We might be on the other side of the world." I thought about that for a second. He did have a good point. One that I truly didn't, and I don't know if anybody else really considered.
"Maybe we aren't even on Earth anymore." I suggested the possibility. Even going as far as something out of global. I thought that would have given me a crazy face, but they surprising didn't.
"Joe, have you noticed that Matt treats T.K. like a burden more than anything? Not even like a brother." Tai questioned, and I thought for a second. It was true, from the few days that I have seen them together in the same place, now it bothered me. I nodded.
"He does, but then again, he doesn't really treat anybody that well either. But he is his little brother, so he needs to be nicer at least." I said, thinking about how Matt's treated me so far. I walk over to where the fire is at. Maybe I was wrong, he might have been great to everybody else before I came. Then it was myself who pulled him to act like this.
"I think we should do night watches. All the guys can do it." I suggested, and only said the guys because I wanted to be kind to Mimi and Sora. Since this was a job that I think would make more since for us, and not in the sexist way. In the considerate way. Matt looked like he actually agrees with me for once, at least to the most part.
"Okay, but T.K. shouldn't do any watches. He's doesn't know how to. Plus, I don't know if he could carry the burden of doing so." T.K. looked offended by this. Now I was getting really pissed at Matt. I mean, he is going to have to put his trust in this guy more. I mean, sure, he's probably short enough to wear fifth grader clothes, but really. That's just his height, I seen plenty of short people before. The shortest recorded person in history was 26 inches, and she lived until she was twenty-eight.
"I can do it." T.K. tells him, grabbing his brothers shirt. Then he backed off, seeing what problem he had just caused. He made the possible chance of starting a fight without even wanting to. I done that before, but his scared look. It seemed true, and that made me worry for his outcome. Matt shook his head, then pushed T.K. back. That was when Tai got into the argument.
"Hey, let him do a watch! He can do it. He would most likely do it better than you bully. Besides, what is your problem anyways? You treat T.K. like a burden, and Joe like he is just a extra problem in your so miserable life. When in reality, it most likely is just fine. I know, your parents got divorced. Grow up and get over it! It looked like T.K. has pretty well, you immature punk." Matt and Tai were starting to get into a fight. I got into the problem right then.
"Okay! lets do it like this. Izzy starts off the night shift. He does a hour. Tai does the next shift, he does a hour himself. Matt takes the third watch, doing another hour himself. I will take the rest of the night watch. This one time, Matt will get as he requests. However, is later T.K. wants to do watches outside of tonight, he can do so. It is his choice, after all. Matt, you have to respect this." Matt finally looked happy by something I said. Everyone went into the trolley car, and did their best to sleep. Besides my self and Izzy. Matt requested Gabumon to sleep next to T.K., to make him warm. I was at the drivers seat, thinking about my house. Jim was the best break that happened in my life, he always treats me nicely. The problem is that he doesn't think that my dad is doing what he is to me. But he didn't have to deal with this while growing up. He stills live at the house, while attending college. I had enough of thinking about that for one night. But there is one true problem that I have, it seems as if he's hiding something. Something vital, I wonder what it could have been in order for this to happen. I went to the one area that wasn't crowded. Next to where Sora was asleep. I tried to sleep, and I dream.
-There was a little boy about ten years old on a bike. Trying to ride across a street. Next to him, was another boy who was older, about thirteen or something.
"Joe, remember, when you ride a bike, look straight ahead. Always keep your wheels turning, and when you tilt, do it ever so slightly. The more you tilt, the further in the opposite direction you will go. Do you understand this so far?" I realized that it was a younger version of Jim and I. Back in the days when he was trying to teach me to ride a bike. The younger me was able to succeed, after many, many more tries. After that, years went by. I was riding the bike everywhere I went. Despite how far it was. I was even considered to be one of the best bike riders in my neighborhood. I was very unpopular now, but back then, I was the person to go to. That is, if you needed lessons in ridng bikes. I was even better than Jim at it. That was until I was sixteen, when I came home one night. My father was waiting for me, and when I showed up, he punched me really hard in the face. I grabbed my face, and punched him back with my other hand. Defending myself like I should have done when somebody did this to me. But I normally never did, and let it all absorb inside of me. That was a problem. He also did his best to ruin the bike. He then threw it away, my main transportation was now permanently gone. He looked at me, as if inviting me to do another strike. I decided not to, since I knew right away that this would give him pleasure. As well as the right to give a blow to me. I didn't want that from him. I didn't want his pleasure, but my pain.
"Not everything in life is perfect Joe, learn that! When you find something that you love to do or have, will disappear. The best way to live your life is if you live it by sorrow. Look around your block, within that distance alone, you would find many sad things. Like the homeless, they know that there lives aren't going to improve anytime soon, but they still hope for something good to happen to them anyways. Or the people at your school who have problems with their parents, or getting clothes, or finding something to eat everyday. This should help you learn to respect the good things that you have going for you in your life." I was dumbfounded by how hypercritical he was just at that moment. He looked away from me for a moment, and I was just standing there. In pure shock, and then he looked back at me. I was still having one of my hands on my face from the really hard punch he just gave me.
"What do you want? Get out of my sight you despicable child!" I ran to the bathroom, so I could just hide for a moment. The next day, Jim wanted to know what was wrong.
"Why didn't ride to school on your bike today? You always do that." I decided to tell him the truth."
"It got destroyed. Somebody took it apart and threw it in the garbage. I should try something else for my transportation. Maybe skateboarding or something like that."
"I can help you learn to skateboard. After all, I've been teaching almost everything that you know since you were seven." I nodded to this, because I knew that it was true. We shook our hands to this.-
I woke up, and noticed that Matt and Tai were talking outside. I got a little bit closer to the window, so I could listen to what they were saying. I know, eavesdropping was wrong. But I'm allowed to wonder about some things, aren't I?
"Hey Matt, it's currently not your turn to be on watch." Matt looked down, because he knew that this was true.
"Yeah, I know. But I tried to sleep, and I couldn't do it. I guess I just have to many things running through my mind right now. Tai, I want to tell you something right now. I wanted to say sorry for how I was." Tai was facing in Matt's direction.
"What is it that you want to talk with me about? By the way, thanks for apologizing. At least you came through in the end. I guess that this is good enough at least." Matt took a deep breath, and spoke again.
" T.K.'s not my full on brother, after my mother and father got divorced, we've been considered to only be half brothers. But I miss taking care of him, if I remember correctly, the divorce was about three or four years ago. At first, I wasn't supportive of being a big brother, but for the first couple of years of his life, I grew to love it. Is there anything that you didn't want to do at first, but when you started doing it, it clicked in with you? And you just can't see not doing it, or miss not doing it?." Tai was going to respond, when a upsetting noise was made. They both fell over on their backs, and the entire trolley car started shaking. Everybody who was asleep woke up right at that moment. I lead them all outside, so we could help Matt and Tai. Some big sea monster jumped out of the water, and I almost screamed. It was under the rock our trolley car was on! Everybody else was starting to scream also. Then Tentomon started speaking.
"This is my fault. I wasn't paying attention when I was holding the hot water in my hands, and it spilled on the monsters open spot. Sorry guys, will you forgive me." Tai confessed, and I didn't really care in that moment if he did it or not.
"Oh no, what are we going to do? It's Seadramon, one of the waters most feared digimon. I suggest that we leave." I couldn't reach Matt or Tai, so instead I decided to call them over.
"Everybody! Gather around me! We might be a little safer if we do that!" I yelled at them, hoping, truly hoping they would listen to me. I didn't want them to die, I wanted them to all be safe, and be able to tell this story to their kids in the future. Okay, going way to far into the future. But still, you never know. Matt and Tai both listened. Everybody else was coming to me also, besides one person. That was T.K. He was trying to get over to us, and his shoe untied. That was when he tripped, losing almost three whole seconds of running. That is huge in a situation like this. Seadramon grabbed a hold of T.K. and dropped him into the water. Matt jumped in and swam all the way to where he was. I have to admit, I should give Matt some points for courage. He tried climbing on top of Seadramon, but kept failing. He kept on falling back down to the water. After a few tries, he looked at us, and I could see it. I could see the terror in his face. But then Seadramon grabbed ahold of Matt, and it started to tighten its grasp onto him. Matt was yelping in pain, and I started to run to him.
"T.K., I'm so sorry for what I said. I knew that you could do it by yourself. I was just scared of what may happen. That is my problem, and I need to learn from it myself. If I survive this, I promise to try and be more supportive of you doing your own things." Matt said, and gasped, then started to show real tears coming down form his face. That was really hard for me to see. Gabumon had a light surrounding it, much like the one that Agumon had when it digivolved into Greymon. Matts strange device that we got when we entered into this world was glowing as well.
"Gabumon digivolve to... GARURUMON!" It was the mixture between a dog and a werewolf. With blue streaks going down its entire it could body. Its power was that shoot out blue flames of ice at its opponents. Tentomon spoke again.
"That's Garurumon, its coat is like of solid metal." Izzy looked over at the bug. As if not really trusting n what it was saying.
"Is this true or was it another rumor that you heard one time?" Tentomon shook its head, but don't ask me what that was supposed to mean.
"Roaring Blaster!" Garurumon yelled, and the ice was enough to get Seadramon to stop constricting Matt. Matt fell into the water, and swam towards us. Seadramon was about to advance towards ua,a dn Garurumon looked like it was ready to go again.
"Roaring Blaster!" Garurumon yelled, and Seadramon bit the leg of Garurumon. Then the werewolf digimon jumped out of the water, and pounced on Seadramon. The battle was pretty violent if you ask me. Then Seadramon breathed ice on the water, and was about to freeze Garurumon, when Matt's digimon broke free. Then attacked again, and Seadramon swam away underwater, but I would have no idea where to. Matt swam with Gabumon back to the rock, and Gomamon called upon the fish again.
"I call upon the fish! Thou all should all get some rest soon. I shalt to." We went to the shore, and somewhere crashing again quickly. Sora and Izzy slept back to back. Both just out of extreme fatigue. Mimi used her hat as a pillow. Not a bad idea. T.K. and Matt were next to each other. Matt was playing his harmonica. I smiled; maybe this wasn't such a bad job after all. Maybe it will get better from here, I now felt a even stronger sense of responsibility to protect everyone here. Starting tomorrow, I will try to help out as much as I can. I need to contribute in order to be accepted, not just be the oldest. I closed my eyes while thinking to this. But before that, I heard Matt and T.K. talking a little.
"Matt, you're the best," T.K. whispered.
"Thanks squirt." Matt said next to him, and Tai was watching them behind a tree.
----
CHAPTER 5: BIRDRAMON GETS FIREPOWER
The next day, we were all ready to start traveling around again. I think all of us were already getting used to walking around by now. Although I personally given up on the idea that we were going to find the other campers. I mean, three full days, but still no sign of them. Come on, it was almost fully lost hope. However, I was just more worried about finding some place that we could have a good resting spot at everyday, I can't let these people down. Matt and Tai were talking to each other. So nice for those two, to have so many friends and people that respect you for who you really are.
"Matt, is there anybody that you like at school? Any special person that you want to wow." Tai said, and Matt had a nervous look on his face. I wouldn't know why though. How could such a guy like Matt be nervous over a question that is as simple as that? I was dreaming it most likely.
"Nobody really. I want to be at least in college before I even start looking into that kind of stuff. Boyfriends, girlfriends, they all sound way too hard for me. Maybe someday, if somebody really does go very the top and impresses me beyond belief." Matt responded, and I saw that I wasn't dreaming. Just seeing that he at least some reasonable expectations for himself. That was good.
"Oh come on. I doubt it will take more than like a hour of your day now. It's nothing too bad. Trust. I crushed on many people before, and nothing came out of it." Tai told him, and Matt shook his head in what seemed like horror. Still, like I said, I was kind of jealous. Jealous that they could get along so well. When I don't really have anybody that could get along with me. I just have my older brother and Sarah. Should I really even count Sarah, since I just became friends with her just a little while back? That's when we saw a black gear flying in the sky. It looked like it was headed to a mountain, but I couldn't see it after a while, so I might have been wrong.
"Did anybody see that?" T.K. asked, and I hoped he was talking about the black gear.
"Are you talking about the black gear that was just flying by?" I asked, and he nodded. So I wasn't the only who saw it. So I wasn't just imagining it. I wonder what it could have been then.
At the top of the giant mountain called Infinity Mountain, Devimon was looking at us walking along.
"These kids are so clueless as to what is going to happen. Maybe if they actually start paying attention to their surroundings more often, instead of thinking to themselves constantly. Their first moment of paying attention to something that is not related to fighting was with some of them just now. But that's only one gear. One of my hundreds. One victory that they might have, if that won't bother me all too. I wonder what the gear will reach and take as its target soon." Devimon told himself. Then put his hand in the water. So he could get a closer look as to where it will be heading.
"It looks like it will be going to the Biyomon village. That is one of the digimon of that girl in a blue hat. This will be a interesting one to see the outcome for." Then the water faded away, but this was good enough for him at the moment.
I put my pocket my hands in my pockets, to check what where inside them. Mainly to distract myself from the gear that I saw flying by just a moment ago. Since aside from T.K., nobody else stated that they saw the gear, or anything related to it even. Then that was when I realized I had touched something that wasn't my ring, and I took it out. It was my phone, and I needed to distract everybody for a second. I don't know why, but I decided that I needed to at least give Sarah a call. To at least see how she is doing, and perhaps get her input on the whole matter. Since really, any input in a situation like this counts.
"I need to be alone for a seconds guys," I told them, and it worked. I tried calling Sarah, maybe she would answer. I hoped she would, and on the final ring she finally did. I sighed when I heard her voice showing that she did.
"Hey Sarah, can we talk for a moment? It's Joe speaking." Her response was quick.
"Sure, I can spare a few minutes. What is it that you need to talk to me about?" Okay, can I do all this in a few minutes.
"So my situation is like this. I drove all night, and reached a summer camp the next morning. The head guy, Eric asked me to be the head of the house. Well, I accepted, and like less than twenty minutes later, we were sucked into a giant wave. There are six kids with me. Their names are T.K., Matt, Sora, Tai, Mimi, and Izzy. Just after we woke up from the wave, we found these strange creatures. They call themselves digimon, and we each have one. They are these monsters, and they can go up in level to something even more powerful. I know it's crazy, but this is honestly happening. Two of my group, Tai and Matt, in that order have done this feat already. There are other of these, that have faced us, and oh my gosh, I don't know what to say. Help me please." I explained to her what was going on about me being assigned to protect six kids at a summer camp and us getting sucked into a roaring water. And us getting our digimon, and our encounters, and that fact that we've been stuck making no progress on anything for three days now. I didn't know, I must have sounded super insane while talking to her about this. Even I felt it, and she must have felt it even more than I did. I still hope that this was all just a super bad dream and everything, and that it would all go away soon. Please, let it go away.
"I understand, well it sounds like I can't really be much of assistance to the problems that you are having right now. Are you absolutely positive that this is really happening, and that you're just not like you know, imagining all this?" I looked at the phone screen for a second, and saw that it took me over half an hour to tell her everything.
"I know I'm not imagining this. I honestly wish this was just all imagination, and that I was just having a really bad dream. However, I don't trust that this is it. This is just getting worse and worse, and now even you don't think that I'm telling the truth. Then again, why would I think that you would trust in this, it sounds crazy. Sorry for talking on now, so I think I should be heading out now. I will try calling back a couple of days or so, if I have to." She murmured in agreement, and she hung up on me. I hung up in following pursuit. That was horrible doing, and I must have sounded so sloppy in my explaining. I even was able to pick up on this. Then there's the fact that it sounds like something a third grader would come up for a story that would never get finished. But whatever, I can't really do anything about it, but that is alright. Sometimes, things just can't be stopped. I went back to where everybody was at.
"Sorry for my time, that was longer than I would have planned. Thanks, for waiting for me, and not getting ahead. I appreciate it. I don't really know what our next plans should be, I'm blind to this. Do you guys have anything?" I apologized for taking so long, but they didn't know that I was on the phone with somebody.
"It's alright Joe, do what needs to be done. It is pretty crazy for all of us, and we can understand that. Since we are all going through it. Everybody has their own ways to cope with these things. This is still probably not the craziest thing that I ever heard about going through." T.K. told me, and I wondered to myself. If this wasn't the craziest thing that he ever heard about happening, then what was exactly? This is pretty close to the craziest thing I ever heard about, if not. We went along our way, and we started to see some random signs.
"This leads to the path of pointless signs." Matt said as he read one, and I will admit, I was tempted to laugh for once. "This is totally out of whack," Matt said in addition to what he read on the sign.
"Even I would not be able to some up with that by myself. I wonder who has this kind of sense of humor. Who knows, and comedian." Tai said out loud, and I shook my head. Not in disapproval, but of agreeing. I wouldn't be able to come up with that by myself, even if somebody gave me a challenge to make the strangest thing I could make. I looked back, to see T.K. tripping onto the ground. I ran up to him, and he got up.
"Thanks Joe." He said, and got ahead of us. After letting him get a few feet ahead, Sora started scratching her head. Not really knowing what to say.
"Do you think we should go up to him? I mean, we don't want to separate or something like that. With no place to go, and no direction and sense of idea what this place is." Sora told us, and we all just stood there for a couple second longer.
"I think we should." Izzy said after being silent for a long while. I almost forgot he was there, and him speaking made me remember that he was.
"Izzy, is something worrying you?" Tentomon, his bug digimon asked, and he didn't respond for a couple moments.
"No, I just don't like to talk a lot. Just me. I still think that we should go to T.K." He responded to his digimons question, and we started heading over towards T.K. Even faster than how he was walking, so we could reach him before he gets to terribly far away from us. But then we saw T.K. stop walking, and wanted to see over what.
"Can we please continue walking on?" We soon were in a dessert that was covered by cable poles. They were all destroyed and scattered across the area around. It was strange that we came across two situations like this in the past couple of days. Yesterday, we came across a trolley car, and now today we saw destroyed cable poles. As well as weird signs and black gears. Izzy also thought this was weird, because he pointed it out.
"Don't you think that it's weird that we saw a trolley car last night and now destroyed cable poles." He said, somebody thinks the way I do. Mimi took out her bag, and pulled out a compass. The directions started going all over the place, and I felt that my eyes were about to explode.
"For somebody who hates to travel, you know what to bring with you, Mimi." Tai said, and she said thanks. T.K. looked at Matt.
"Do you think that she's cute?" Matt suggested, and laughed for a second.
"No," T.K. said. But he smiled over the thought of the idea that Matt thought Mimi was cute, even if T.K. hated Mimi. On problem, was as two years older than her.
"Anyways, I have something to show you." T.K. told us, and dug into the ground. Nobody stopped him, since we all knew that there was no purpose. He got something out of the ground, but it zapped him on impact.
"T.K. are you okay?" I asked, and he nodded.
"I knew it would zap me. The thing I wanted you to see was the item." T.K. responded, and he looked at it. I looked down at it, and everybody responded with me.
"A red orb. I find it to be very cool looking. I wonder what it is for. It's not ours though, so we can't take it or anything. Still cool to look at. I wonder if there are more of these around. Even if it was up for grabs, I wouldn't be able to carry it anywhere. Since it zapped me silly." T.K. told us, and it was cool looking. Dark red, and it looked like an eye was in it. At around the center of the piece. Kind of like a ancient ruin that would be in one of those unknown lost cities. Okay, I'm going way ahead of myself. But still, you never know, can be fun to imagine. Everybody can let their minds have fun sometimes. Even myself needs to do so. I was hugely distracted by my thoughts when I heard a huge loud, terrifying noise. The mountain in a far distance started to erupt, and I was scared for a second. But then I realized that it was far into the distance. Tai took out some binoculars from his pocket so he could see into the far sights that he can't grasp with his eyes.
"Guys, I think that I found a village some distance away from here. How about we go there and we could stay for the night." He looked over at us for our input. I was impressed that he could have seen something from like what, several miles away. Those were real impressive binoculars. I wondered what this village was like. Maybe one with the water covering up most of it, and people had to walk on board around town. Like some towns that I saw in documentaries recently.
"I like that idea." I said. "How about you lead the way, Tai, for you are the only one who knows where to go." Tai looked honored about this suggestion. Why would he looked so honored, if he gets to lead his soccer team in most of the games. Well, I guess something else he could brag about on the inside. And we followed his lead to the village. The walk must have been several miles long, and was making me personally tired. I bet most would agree with this. The village was filled with small digimon that looked like the one Sora had when we first went into this place. There were small houses all over the place, like less than four feet high. Even T.K. wouldn't be able to go inside without bending down. Yoda's house in Empire Strikes Back would be proud.
"Hey, Biyomon. What brings you here right now?" One of them asked. I was shocked when I heard it talk, I guess that still need to get over the whole talking creatures concept. That was still beyond confusing for me. I thought I was going insane at first, but now it's just natural surprise. No thinking that I was insane however.
"I have some humans with me, my fellow Yokomon. Do you want to see what they are like? They have such variety, as you can see. None really look the exact same, just same hair styles. Interesting creatures that I found here." The smaller Yokomon looked around at the seven of us. They looked like we were the most insanely interesting thing that has ever existed. I came to the very quick conclusion that they had never seen humans or even heard of the word before. Like how digimon was a whole new concept to us, humans would be a whole new concept to them. Sounds fair to me actually.
"Are these the humans that you speak of? They are quite different each. The only resemblance that they have with each other are the short and second tallest one. What are their names exactly?" One of the Yokomon asked. Biyomon nodded.
" Their names are Matt and T.K. they are related, so that explains why they look closer to the same than the others. Each one of them have a very different take on things, and it interests me beyond belief. You will have fun hanging around with them. They need something to eat and a cool place to rest, they've been traveling around in the desert all day. These kids also got attacked by a Seadramon earlier last night. The one with the Matt kid I said about, Gabumon digivovled into a Garurumon to save us. As well as another one named Agumon digivovled to Greymon to defeat Shellmon. If you don't the humans are named Tai, T.K., Sora my own, Matt, Izzy, Mimi, and Joe. Thei digimon in the respective order is Agumon, Patomon, Biyomon, Gabumon, Tentomon, Palmon, and Gomamon." The Yokomon looked impressed by this. Like they had learned a giant history lesson, and was getting it in. I then came to the conclusion that they were literally babies, and anything sounded amazing and fascinating. They took out a bunch of food, and I instantly had a red alarm blare in my head. Telling them to stop in my thoughts. I didn't want any food that these creatures might want to make for us, because we don't know if it's safe for us or not. Like we wouldn't know if human food would be safe for them. Just kind of some simple knowledge and common sense that we have to take into mind. But I did notice a well in the center of the village, as well as T.K. He ran up to the well, and I followed closely in pursuit. I was getting thirsty, with all the walking in the desert. I would be fine with some drinks. Then again, we don't know how good the water really is. At that moment, my worry part of my brain turned off, and focused on drinking.
"I've been thirsty for such a long time now." T.K. said, and I would almost assure you that we all agreed inside. He took the bucket on the top, and spun the turner on the side, to make it go further in the well. So the water could come up, and at least give us some satisfaction. When he pulled it out of the well, he was excited, But his excitement was soon destroyed, with the fact that there was no more water anymore inside the bucket. Totally pointless now, if you ask me. Instead, it was lava, like the kind that I saw come out of the mountain earlier, I wondered if there was any relationship. I didn't have any time to think about that, since I was too bust screaming my head off over this. Almost beat any thing that we had to deal with. Because at least then, we didn't have any lava coming up to kill us or something. The Yokomon started yelling at us and our digimon partners. Didn't have to ask us a second time, we were already following them down the path they were leading us. Anything was better than lava pouring out and almost killing you, right?
"Come follow us this way, there is a sunken ship that nobody uses!" Wait, a sunken ship nobody uses? How would that be here in a place with no water whatsoever, and only giant loads of sand. Then a few houses that are to small to fit anybody over the age of ten inside of. The whole lot of them yelled at once. It honestly kind of hurt my ears quite a bit. Since it was like a loud ringing of the house bell to me. It was of course, down a huge cliff that was out of or reach. Great, can we have one strait forward thing n this place for once in our 'adventure'? When I was over my fit, I was ready to focus again. So Biyomon started giving us a hand down it. Everybody contributed to getting down the cliff and into the ship. Hey, these babies are actually kind of useful. Maybe this wasn't so bad, and I was just a little overacting. Knowing my luck, I was only making our luck worse.
Matt grabbed about three, as well as T.K., Mimi grabbed about two, Tai got four, and Izzy was only able to carry one. I myself was able to get ten or so, but they had to be stacked up on top of each other. Sora was too busy looking up the cliff to where Biyomon was at, hoping that it would come down to her. I was scared, at least even though Izzy was only able to get one, he still was here and safe. My job as protector instantly kicked in, and I tried running down. Then I tripped, and fell down on my head. My heart skipped a beat when I saw what caused the lava to come out. It was a digimon that was completely made of fire. It honestly looked like Flame-On from Fantastic Four or whatever the fire dudes name was. Geez, giant lava coming down towards us. Then a digimon made fully of lava running like us. Could this get any better honestly? Tentomon gasped, and for once, I would agree with it.
"It's Meramon, a digimon that is all covered by fire. It normally doesn't feel a burn, but it does now." I laughed my head off, how could this not feel a burn? When its entire body was made of fire, that was just entirely stupid. Maybe I would have to think about it to myself first, then it would sense. Ever had those moments before?
Sora was now yelling at Biyomon to come down the cliff and stay safe with everybody else. But Biyomon wouldn't listen, due to needing to help its friends in danger. I was getting angry. At Sora, who wouldn't come over here. Then at Biyomon, who wouldn't listen. This was annoying, and I think there should have been way more to worry about than this. But no, this was more important. It tried to fend its own against Meramon, but failed. Well, I wasn't in any way surprised. Since Biyomon was like two feet, and this Meramon was over eight or nine feet. That's when the lights glowed around it and Soras device. Just like with Matt and Tai before Gabumon and Agumon digivovled. Maybe it was happening again. And it started to experience what Agumon and Gabumon dealt with earlier. Digivolution. I called it, give me twenty dollars.
"Biyomon digivolved to... BIRDRAMON!" It was a big fire bird that was able to fly up to meet with Meramon. Its main power is to shoot heated flames out of its mouth. Wait, Birdramon after Biyomon. A pink bird into a fire bird. Then Garurumon with Gabumon. A dog like wolf into a bigger wolf. Then Greymon after Agumon. A little dinosaur turning into a bigger one. I assumed that whatever we are at, this would be a hint of what they digivolved to next. I had a feeling in my chest.
"Magical Fire!" Birdramon yelled (that's its name in the japanese version). Meramon grew even bigger, and I screamed a little. But everybody else just let out a little gasp.
Meramon hit Birdramon really hard, and it flew down the rocky cliff. I was looking away at that, since it truly did look painful. But after a few seconds or so, Birdramon flew even closer to Meramon, and shot even more fire at it. Meramon made a ball over twice as big, and shot it towards Birdramon, and Birdramon moved to the side. Then fired again at the Meramon. It gave in, and lost the fight. It came down to regular size, and something crazy happened. A black gear flew out of its back, it was probably the same one that we saw earlier. No wait, it was the exact same. I knew right away that there must have been some resemblance towards the two right away. Birdramon went back to Biyomon, and the Yokomon started celebrating over this victory. We went back to the center of the village, where the well was. Also, where this little fight had started, it had finished. With the Meramon giving its sorry.
"Sorry for acting the way I did earlier. The last thing I remembered was when a black gear flew into me. Now I should go off on my own journey to atone for my wrongdoings." The Yokomon looked surprised and happy with this choice that Meramon made. When the Meramon left, we were all handed food by the Yokomon. It was considered to be our nightly dinner. I thought about it for a second, that was what a lot of Japanese people in some stories leave when they have to debate themselves. Like in a way of honor. Interesting to piece those two together. But they are the exact same almost.
"I want some." T.K. said, and he dug into what was in the bowl. It was something that looked like rice to me, maybe poorly made rice. I looked at him, surprised. He didn't even consider it for a single second. I get he was hungry and all, but come on.
" I don't want to eat this food, it could be dangerous. We don't know if it's safe for humans to eat or not." the only people who consented to this were Sora and Izzy. I looked off into the sunset, I was right. This was getting better with each day, and it feels like everybody is starting to accept me more now. This journey wasn't so bad, if you remove the near death experiences, that is. But that is alright. Maybe those would go away soon, I hope so.
----
CHAPTER 6: MIMI AND THE NIGHT SKY
That night, after dinner and everything, I was sitting on a rock, looking at all the other kids and what they were doing. The Yokomon were asleep by now, and the houses were to small for us to sleep in. It was nearly ten or eleven at night. I remember when you're a kid, no older than six or seven, and you think that even staying up until nine thirty is really impressive. Matt and Tai were talking about the last couple of days and what's happened. I couldn't blame them, I mean come on. With all the stuff that's happened, you would stop and talk about this when you got your first honest chance.
"Whose digimon are you betting is going to digivolve next?" Matt asked Tai, and Tai thought about it for a couple of seconds. I honestly didn't know myself, since the reality is, it could happen to any of us at any time. But I noticed that it normally happens when we are in real big danger. So I doubt it would just happen right this instant right when everybody was asleep. Just my opinion.
"I'm guessing either Izzy or Mimi, I think T.K. is going to advance up later than most of the group. Joe isn't that bad of a guy, if I were to be honest." Matt shook his head. I wonder why he was shaking his head. I mean, there was nothing to shake his head for. Unless if he had huge bugs in his head or something.
"He's worse than that bad. He doesn't care about anybody besides himself." What, where did he get that from? What did I do to him that makes him allowed to talk about me like this? I did nothing wrong to him at all, and yet he's sitting here, talking all bad and crap about me, and he expects me to be chill with this all? No way. Not going to happen.
"I'm tired, I think I'm going to try to go to sleep now." Tai, and Matt looked down, and let Tai go to bed. Matt stared at the sky for about a couple of minutes or so, and then he tried to go to sleep himself.
T.K. was already sound asleep, but everybody kind of predicted that he was going down first. Since he had eaten all the bad rice, and threw up from it. Just as I predicted. He wouldn't be sick, just ate something bad. He would get over it soon. Before the next day happens, I'm sure.
Izzy was typing on his computer. I still wonder what he was putting on there, maybe I should ask sometime. I put it in my list of things to do. Maybe he was typing a huge story or something. That would be something else. Like writing in a computer log of each days adventure. Unlikely, so I stopped thinking of it.
Sora was looking off into where I was at, and she was walking around nervously. She took off her cap, and put it up against her chest. And started to look a little dreamy, and she tilted her face a little bit.
"Hey Joe, good night. I hope to see you tomorrow." Sora walked up to me, and said. And smiled a little, but she went off to sleep herself. She walked around, to around Matt's location before settling down. Izzy stopped typing on his computer, and I gave up on all rules that I made when I first showed up. Since I now saw how stupid it was. Being on the computer was part of him, and in some strange cases, needed to be on it a lot. Weird how that could happen. Izzy closed his computer, and made himself comfortable next to Tentomon. He went to sleep himself.
I noticed that Mimi and I were the only ones that were awake at this moment. She walked forward into my direction, and sat down next to me. As if she was waiting for us to be the only ones. This confused me.
"Hey Joe, can we talk?" Mimi asked. I was wondering why she would want to talk to me. I mean, I was just a normal guy who just showed up.
"Sure, I wasn't planning on going to sleep for a couple of hours anyways. Been having trouble sleeping lately. What about you? Why do you want to talk to me, of all people? The man who just came here like what, ten minutes before this whole crapfest started?" Mimi took off her hat. Then put it down, and let it stay there without worrying.
"I have something that I need to confess to you." I got off the rock, and lied down onto the bare ground, and offered her to join me. She accepted.
"Why do you want to confess something to me though? You could like talk to Sora about this, female to female." She shook her head in a way that showed that I just didn't quite fully understand.
"No, you are the only one I could talk to about this. I trust you; you were assigned to protect all of us. So if I have a secret I need to tell, you are the one. I can also request that you can't tell anybody else. So if I do make that kind of request, will you say yes? Plus, you're the head and oldest here, so that makes me more inclined to do it towards you." Really, just because I was the oldest. That seemed rather lame.
"So, tell me this. If Matt was here, and not me, would you be talking to him about this? Since he was the last head, and the oldest." I asked, and didn't care about what it sounded like.
"Hey, I'm the second youngest here. Don't be fooled by height, even Izzy's older than me to. I know, I'm in his class. His birthday is in May, and mine in November. T.K. is the only one in the entire lot younger than me. And he's only younger by two months. He is supposed to be in ninth grade like Izzy and I, because he was up until fourth grade, but then he got held back that year. If I recall correctly, that is the year after his parents got divorced." I was shocked by this outcome, that would explain why T.K. was in high school level house. Since he was supposed to be in high school. Wow, he really did not grow well, if he's only two months younger than Mimi, and still like an entire foot shorter. Or Izzy, if he's six months older, and half a foot shorter. That wasn't important though, just caught me off guard. Although I was ready to talk to her about what she needed to talk about.
"Of course, just talk it all out. I'm here to listen to you." I got myself as comfortable as I could possibly could, for I understood that this was going to last a while. I can't believe that I was having a conversation with the cheerleader. Think about it, I the nerd of the entire school, talking with the, I admit the prettiest cheerleader in the entire school. That was something I would have never expected to happen in my entire school life.
"This is something I have never told anybody before, not even my parents. But I'm just so confused! I've been very drawn to females and their charming beauties for as long as I can remember. But I also think some guys are very attractive. Most of them since I was ten. Wow, this is confusing." This finding surprised me; I always assumed that she was pursuing some amazing guy that she would consider to be her prince charming. My respect for her is already going up just by her being so honest and open to somebody like... me. Her mentor who always yelled at her over not listening to me. I feel impressed, and I was already more of friends with her than I would have ever been. She took a picture out, and I looked at it. It was of her in a brown shirt and blue jeans. She had no hat or gloves or anything. Around her, there was two older people. One was a man, who looked Japanese, and a woman who looked kind of American. I assumed that these were her parents.
"Are these your parents? I know this second question is weird, but what race are you?" I knew that was the most racist thing that I said in a long time, but it was weird to think about. I asked Mimi, but I wouldn't blame her if she didn't want to answer this. I mean, it's not my business what kind of race she was. But something makes me just want to know! Seriously, this is just annoying. Why the heck am I thinking like this right now?
"I'm full North American, my father told it openly to me. That I was adopted, I lived in America until about four years ago. When I was eleven. I'm from Canada, but I moved to New York when I was about three years old. My adopted father is thirty-nine years old right now, and my adopted mother is thirty-six. They said they met in middle school for her, and early high school for him. At America, I was starting to make a lot of friends when I was there, but when I moved to Obadiah, Japan I had to start from the bottom all over again. I really don't want to talk about why, since the subject of… him still bothers me. It took almost three years, but I became popular again, but you probably don't really care about my popularity level, do you?" I shrugged, I just wanted this conversation to go on for a while longer. I was having a ton of fun talking to her surprisingly. But I wonder who this 'him' was. Like some guy that she knew when she was younger maybe. Could be possible. You never know, maybe I would be lucky, and she would tell me. But I wouldn't press the subject on her though.
"Mimi, can I show you something?" I asked her. Not really thinking about it, I was turning the subject into myself. Great, now I was being selfish, and it was showing pretty quickly.
"Yes, you can show me anything." I showed her my right arm, so she can examine it. It was nice of her to open up and say yes like this after I was saying yes to her so nicely all that time. Kind of a repaying of favors, I suppose. There was a small cut on it, a scar to be exact. It was from a fight that my father and I had when I was fourteen. It still hurts if I really push on it hard enough. It used be half the size of my own hand, but like any wound, it shrinks as time goes time. It was still most likely going to stay there forever though. In some way.
"It was from a fight me and my dad had. I got my report card one year, and it said I had a C+ in math class. A normal one now but hard at the age, like algebra or something like that. He threw a fit over it, over a C+, in a class barely anyone passes. The fit was almost worst than a eight year old not getting the candy they want, I'm not kidding. That's how bad it was. What was his problem? Let's just say that my father didn't take this news very well. As you might have guessed for yourself however. We got in a big fight, and cut he cut my hand with a piece of sharp glass. From a glass cup that he threw on the floor, to get at me with. I mean, really, what's the point in destroying a good cup to get at somebody. I truly don't get it. Even now. Blood started to seep all over the floor, and he laughed over it. Like in a horror movie that's really cheesy. I have been able to take this decade long misery very well. To the point that my older brother doesn't even think that I telling the truth when I tell him about my pain. I don't want to talk to a counselor about it, because they might tell others about it. I even cry myself to sleep on some nights. One time, I even shoved my entire fist down my throat, and I was even able to tolerate it without problem. You have no idea." I was starting to have tears come down my eyes a little bit. Mimi even put one of her arms around me for support, and used her other hand to wipe my face.
"I'm so sorry. This must have been difficult for you, am I the first person you've ever told about this? You have friends to talk to." I felt so nice in her embrace, like how I imagine a person feeling in their mothers grasp. Sad how Mimi is more of a mom than my real mom, no, it' kind of interesting to think about honestly. I tried to open my eyes to see into her direction, with no luck.
"My first friend that I ever made was the night before I arrived at summer camp. My brother has taught me everything I know, and I'm glad that I have somebody like that in my life. I just don't understand why he won't even consider that I'm even telling the truth for a moment. I can't talk about this anymore, because I seriously doubt that you really care about what I have say." Mimi shook her head. I smiled a little, I was able to talk to something about this. She listened to.
"I would be fine with you talk to me further about this, but if you don't want to, I can't force you." I looked up into the night sky, and sighed a little.
"Do you want to know something interesting? I have been able to learn about every single star on Earth. But here, there are just so many things that I have to learn about at this place. I feel like a baby again, who has to learn everything all over again. It feels like I've just been able to make enough progress to the equality of barely being able drink a baby bottle myself. If you know what I mean by that. Like, what exactly are digimon? I understand that they are digital monsters and all of that. But how is that even possible?" Mimi spoke after a few minutes of just listening to me.
"I can see here you are coming from, in fact I thought I was the only one who thinks like this. I don't like being a cheerleader, to be honest, I only do it to make my parents happy and proud. They want to see their child grow up and become famous. My dad spoils me rotten, and I don't understand why he does. He told me one time that he thinks he owns me for something, but no he doesn't. If anything, I own him for all the things that he has done for me and to benefit my life as much as possible. He even gives me like five meals a day, or even more, depending on what I want. he says that we have enough money for me, but I saw his check once by accident, and what we owe. We are almost two hundred dollars under. But I still don't think that my sad story I just gave you even compares to the one you gave me." I took off my glasses, and yawned.
"You should go to your place, and get some sleep. I will do the same, thank you very much for that talk." She agreed, and headed off and fell asleep when she went to where she wanted. I stayed up for about another half hour or so, and went to sleep myself. For once in the last few nights, I was able to sleep nicely.
----
CHAPTER 7: KABUTERIMON's ELECTRO SHOCKER
I was the first person to wake up the next day. I got all of our things put together, so when we leave, we wouldn't need to take several hours getting ready. But I did keep the normal cooking stuff out for us, just in case if they wanted breakfast. I would personally not really care if we did or not. But since I am their head of consular, I would have to do in a way what they think is best. So I was getting everything out, and that took about twenty minutes. Matt was the second person who woke up, and he waved hi to me.
"Hey Joe, getting cooking stuff out right now, I can see." He said, and got out a couple things with me.
"Thanks Matt, yeah, as you already saw, I was getting some of the cooking stuff ready." I responded to his question and thanked him for his slight assistance. Then he looked away and wouldn't even give knowledge to my existence anymore. That was what bothered me in a way, was that he helped me, and soon as that was over, he didn't even care to talk to me anymore. I checked around the village to see what was in it. Well, a closer look at it. The Yokomon were away at the moment. They were doing their daily hunting. Biyomon told us that this was part of what they do when they wake up every morning. When everybody was awake, Matt made each of us breakfast. He said that he shouldn't get any help, since it was a general agreement form all of us that he was the best of the cookers in the group. Although he did ask for help on getting plates ready at least, and we did that for him. When he was passing around the food to everybody, he walked past me, stopped or a second, and slowly gave me a meal as well. As if he was debating himself. He smiled a small amount at me, and just walked away as if that moment never happened. Am I actually starting to grow on him. This was the impression that I was gathering, I hoped that I was right, and he wasn't playing with me or anything like that. Like most people did to me, and I was getting angry of it. Sorry, wasn't meaning in the group. Just in normal everyday situations. After breakfast, we took of to make more progress. We were in a sort of forest like area, but we were much closer to being in a normal plain field that no real amazing value to it. This was when Izzy tried using his computer, but the wireless failed. I looked at it, and wondered if maybe we were just in the wrong place.
"Strange, just last night, my wireless was able to work just fine. Maybe it has something to do with our setting, or can only work at certain hours in this landscape in general." He started rubbing his chin, as if in a examination sort of way. I remember my teacher doing that to me sometimes when he would grade my papers. Then he would always hand it back to me, and gives me the same results.
'At Mr. Kido'. This was his response every time, and I would never get anything lower, and a different phrase. I was thinking over that, and didn't even notice when Tai grabbed the computer away from him, and started whacking it.
"Just give it a good old whack and everything will work out just fine." Izzy tried to get it back from Tai, but tai wouldn't give it back. Sora jumped into the scene and joined Izzy's side. I was about to get into it, but I decided against it. Since his laptop of course, none of my business.
"Tai, he doesn't want you to do that to his computer!" I was looking, and not really having a point of view one way or the other. I mean, it is his property, and it is wrong to mess around with other peoples property. I get that. But I would also like it if Izzy didn't use his computer nearly as much, and paid at least some more attention to us. But again, I shouldn't really have a say in what Izzy does or does not do, as long as it doesn't hurt us in the long run. She grabbed his shoulder, and he stopped because he got distracted. I started to groan over dark misery because of Tai. He was kind of a jerk in my honest opinion. I get that he's just a teenager and all of the stuff, but he still needs to learn some manners while he has a chance. But then again, we're all teenagers. Some earlier on the line. Like T.K. at 14. Izzy, and Mimi at 15. But still, Tai is in the middle of his teen years, he should kind of not use that as an excuse. But I also when I think about it, see that he was being rude, and should at the very least apologize for what he did.
"Tai apologize to Izzy, what did he ever do to you?" Tentomon said, and Tai sighed. Like he didn't want to, and didn't really see why he would have to.
"Fine Izzy, sorry for almost running your all so important computer that you just can't live without." Tai said, obviously sarcastic. I was able to detect it from a mile away, but I kept my mouth shut, and let that be good enough.
"Fine, I guess that this will do." Izzy said. He was also able to tell that Tai didn't mean it. But he could also tell that he wasn't going to get anything better from Tai either. So he just took it the way it was, and had no argument with it.
'Can we please just move on?" Matt asked, and I gave him acknowledge that we should. Since we had kind of been there for a while, without making any sort of progress. That is kind of a problem, and we should make at least some today, and not just talk over a laptop that is still perfectly fine. If you remove the wireless problem. After about another twenty minutes of walking, I saw a old factory. I was able to tell right away, with the black smoke that went all the way up into the sky. As if there were people working there. Wait, people. This might be at least a small chance of hope that we have now.
"Guys, look over there, I see a old factory. There might be humans in there, form the black smoke up in the sky. I think that we might be making some good lead way in it now." I told them from a few feet away, since I ran ahead to see if the factory was really there, and not my imagination. Everyone came up to me to see what I was talking about. I was pointing in the direction of the factory. The black smoke coming out of it smelt really bad to, so that should prove that it was still being used In some way. It smelled like burned coal, so maybe this could have been a mining factory. Since I don't know if this is true, but I think miners use coal to do their mining sometimes. I wondered if my theory was right. But there was something else to think about, Izzy's laptop. Maybe Izzy's wireless problem would be fixed if we went inside and checked around it a little. It was worth a solid and good try, in my opinion.
"I think we should go inside, all in favor say I". Matt said.
"I." Everybody yelled, with the exception of T.K.
'Do we really have to go in there? No really, think about it. What has been one thing that has happened every time we go somewhere? We get attacked. I highly bet that we will get attacked again, and I don't want to deal with that again. Since we don't know when something is finally going to beat us, and we might lose our lives for it. I'm personally not for it." T.K. asked us, and gave his reasoning. I would have never really thought of that if he didn't point it out. I see that it was a good point, one that we should all think about. I shook my head.
"We don't exactly have to go in there. But since this is the first sign of possible human life that we found so far, we should at least give it a chance. Besides, we might be able to solve Izzy's wireless problem that he's having if we check it out. Like I said, if you don't care over the whole wireless thing, we could at least care about the face that it is our first chance to find human life." I said, and I saw T.K. get a not very thrilled look on his face. When he nodded, I knew he reluctantly agreed, and we all went on our way to go inside.
"How about we all split up? To cover more distance." Tai said. "I say that Joe, Sora, and I go in a group. Matt, Mimi, and T.K. go in there own group. Izzy, you should probably go off on your own to check out our wireless problem. So we will leave you to that for yourself." I could tell that Izzy was not at all fond of the idea of going on his own. We all split up in the order that Tai suggested. I wonder why he decided to take the deciding into himself so quickly. I think that we should all have a deciding factor when it comes to things like this. We should all be united, even if one disagrees. Like with T.K. just now, he didn't like the idea, but he still went with it. Tai, Sora and I were walking down the different hallways of the factory, and checked to see what was in the rooms. I had no clear preference, since like Tai said, we should just cover up some places. In one room, we found a jar. Inside it was a claw. Like one that you would find in a museum. I wondered what kind of thing it was. The time when we need Tentomon the most, he isn't there to talk to us about it. I touched the jar, and felt a cold breeze down my arms.
"That feels nice. But where did this come from? I wonder if we should take it, to ask another digimon what it could possibly mean. It could be lost history for all we know." I said, and Tai took a quick look at it himself.
"I don't know. Looks like it could be of a long lost monster. I'm not quite sure what to say. Maybe we should, and see when we can get the first chance for something to tell us of it." Tai replied, and looked at Sora. "Hey, what do you think?" She walked over to us, and touched the jar for herself.
"Feels cold when I touch it. Maybe we could, it could be very interesting to find out of its past story, after all. I say Joe should hold it. Since he is the one with the medical bag." Sora said, and I nodded. She had a good point.
"Alright, next village we visit, we ask what this is. See if it has any value, or is just something really cool looking." I said, and did as she suggested. Put it in my medical bag, and we looked around the rest of the room. I could find anything interesting, but Tai called us over. Sora and I ran to him.
"I see a room down the hall. Let's go down it." Tai said, and we did. I wondered if anything would be there.
Matt, T.K., and Mimi were checking out the working room. It was to their surprise that nobody was in the factory. What was even stranger to them was the fact that the parts were still working.
"What are the machines doing, Matt? Also, if nobody is here, how are they are working? And, how could nobody be here if they have the factory still running very well?" T.K. asked him, and he was confused as well. Three questions that had no answer. All three good points though. It was showing some products that they were making getting built up with each step, and then they were removing the parts all over again once they reached a certain point. It actually sort of looked like a robot was being built. What kind of robot though, none of the three knew.
"I don't know, squirt, looks like the master factory of building and destroying. Kind of counterproductive. To build these tools, and then start to take them apart once they reach a certain point. Am I the only one who thinks that it sort of looks like a robot?" Mimi started sighing.
"All the machinery stuff and talk is giving me a headache. I see a big red button here, I want to see what it does." Matt looked he wanted to shoot himself because of how whiny she is. Mimi pressed the red button, and some things on the other side of the room started working. Like a sink for instance. T.K. walked over to the sink, and turned it off.
"Now we know not to use that one." T.K. said, and picked up a item on the sinks side. It was a golden necklace. "Interesting find, but not mine, or either of yours. So I will put it back, and we shouldn't grab it." T.K. told them, and walked back to them. As if they should examine some other things. To make sense of some of this stuff.
Izzy was wandering around by himself, checking for some place that he could rectify his Wi Fi problem. Tentomon was following him. He was just trying to find a room that looked promising enough to have a socket and workable connection. What the others didn't know, was that the computer was more or less a pretty big part of his life. He used it almost every day. Since he checked emails, and talked to a few friends with it. As well as doing his own things on them. He sort of set all his things on it.
"Izzy, what is it about your computer that you find so interesting?" Izzy looked over at Tentomon. He was so absorbed in trying to figure out a way to solve this problem that he forgot of Tentomon's existence. That was his fault, and he wanted to apologize to the bug. But he didn't know the best way to.
"I just really like the way that they work, just so cool how each one is different. Besides, almost every project that I have done for the last few years have been recorded onto here. Such as simple school related things, to my profiles. Or writings. Almost nothing that I have would be here without it. By the way, sorry Tentomon for kind not paying attention to you. I'm just kind of thinking about this. So I apologize I don't really pay enough attention to you for a while. When I get this problem solved, I will pay more notice to you." The two of them found a big chamber, and he went inside it. It was filled with strange markings, each of them different from all the others. Izzy honestly thought that it was symbolizing stuff like Egypt. Okay, maybe not Egypt, but old places that history is almost lost and people are only kind of guessing what happened during those times. Like thousands years of history. There was a power outlet in the room, and Izzy ran up to it. He plugged his charger into it, and his computer started to charge, and it rebooted back up again. There was Wi Fi in here, so his wireless problem was fixed.
"Yes, I got it done. Thank you, for whoever made this power outlet. Now it just needs to recharge, and I can see if my wireless can work." Izzy said, and Tentomon walked up to Izzy. He was able to pick up the plea in his voice, like it would have sort of pained him to lose his computer. Beyond just doing his years of work on it. Like it was the only way to get over something.
"Izzy, is there something you don't want to talk about? You sound like you're trying to hide something about yourself. Perhaps you have dark origins, you know I'm here to talk to you if you need me." Tentomon said, trying to get his attention. Izzy looked off in a direction that Tentomon could not, he was hiding something, but he didn't want to talk about it. He was having a flashback to a few years back. Ten years back, which was when he was five.
"Do you think that we should tell him of his parents?" His mother asked, and his father sounded unsure.
"Let's have him at least think that he is normal for a while. We can't let him find out now, or else he will be traumatized for life. For what the truth is." The father responded.
"I see your point. But he will also feel the same way if we don't tell him. Then he will feel betrayed." Young Izzy was listening, wondering what they were talking about. He went to the door of his room, and listened closely.
"His parents are gone. He's adopted. How could we get those two sentences together and tell him without him feeling like we sort of betrayed him for many years?" His father asked, and they were both silent. Izzy let out a little five-year-old gasp, but they didn't her him.
Tai, Sora, and I were walking around in that room that Tai wanted to examine. Inside it was a bunch of gears turning round and round. But as I looked closer, I noticed that they weren't exactly turning round. Instead, there was a android in between the two gears, it looked like it was stuck. There was also something that Tai was completely focused on, that was completely unrelated to the android.
"Guys, come to check this out." Tai said. Sora and I went up to him, to see what it was. It was a picture. A black and white one, and it had two people in it. One was old, and the other looked middle aged.
"That guys looks like me." Sora said. "By the face, that is." I looked at the middle aged guy, as she was talking about. He sort of did resemble what she looked like. With his face, the nose, the ears. The eyes, mouth, and hair. The old man looked like one in his eighties. Easy. He was smiling while giving a small laugh at the same time. The two men looked like they were having a good time.
"I wonder how old this picture is?" Tai asked, and I shook my head. Not knowing. At least sixty, because of the face that the background said 1929 on it.
"Interesting. Maybe I should take it before it gets destroyed, or lost forever." Sora said, and Tai handed her the picture. She put it in her pocket. Then I walked to the android. I wondered what it was doing.
"Do you think that we should get the android out of the gears?" I asked both of them. They weren't really thinking about it until I pointed it out. Since they were still thinking about the picture that they found. But it was time to not think about that anymore.
"It's worth a try." Tai answered my question. I went to the left side, and Tai went to the right. I asked Sora to pull on the shoulders, so we would be going on all three ends, and Sora followed our lead. We pulled on the droid, and we couldn't make it. We sat on the ground for a minute or so, panting. We tried again, and we pulled even harder this time around, and we made it. It got up on its own, and took aim at us.
"I'm Andromon, one of the most powerful digimon on File Island." The android looking thing said to us, and it raised one of its arms. The hand started spinning around, and it turned into some sort of attack. I was able to get Tai and Sora out of the way, while our digimon jumped out of the way by themselves. I kind of pushed them hard, and they thudded on the ground. I ducked, and that was how I got out of the way. We got up right away, and started running from it. Leaving it no chance to attack us, which was a good idea at the moment.
"Come and get us if you can!" Tai yelled towards the android. Tai jumped up and down several times, to get the android to follow us.
"Yeah, sure, why not taught the deranged robot further! Besides, following is the opposite of what we want it to do. By the way." I yelled towards Tai. We ran out of the room, and tried to get away from the android. I sort of had to grab Tai really hard, and I bet I was hurting him a lot to save him. Sora didn't need any convincing, she got out of the way easy. In fact, she was waiting for us to hurry up and reach her. So we could start leaving the android again.
Matt, Mimi and T.K. were still checking out the machinery room, but they were making no progress with figuring anything out. They were just seeing different things getting built up, then getting taken back down again. It was starting to tick Matt off really bad, and Mimi was covering her eyes so she didn't have to witness any of this anymore.
"I think we should just move on. We are just wasting our time, and you guys can agree to this." T.K. said, and started nearly walking out of the room. But Matt called him back.
"Let's at least wait until somebody shows up. Maybe they can help. If they can't help us, then we should just wait. Matt said, and T.K. returned to them. Even though he didn't want to waste any more time at this. He wanted to move on, so they could find more things to help them out. But Matt was right, maybe they could find something if they looked harder.
Izzy was in the same chamber, when the screen on his computer started to do some weird things. Like letters were getting bigger and strange messages appeared on it. So pretty much like the thing on Google called Epic, if you remove the strange messages.
"I might be able to figure out some things about this world right now. I'm about to drop my theory about us being on an alien planet. Maybe I can even be able to discover the secret to digivolution. Plus, you guys being aliens is a little bit of a stretch, when I think about it. Tentomon, I want to talk about something." He started to get real absorbed in his computer, to the point where he didn't even notice that his device was glowing. Not the kind of glowing that happens when you digivolve either. It was starting to burn Tentomon's skin. The only way Izzy gave knowledge to Tentomon's existence was by asking that question.
"Izzy, it hurts, stop it! I can't answer your question unless if you talk care of the problem." Izzy looked over at Tentomon to see what the problem is. Since in his mind, the only problem was just Tentomon demanding attention like a second grader with their mom.
"Sorry if my research is starting to hurt you but I'm try to figure out something important. It might even be helpful to us later on. Besides, I wanted to ask you a question, and you haven't given a slight clue towards wanting it answer it." Izzy snapped, and Tentomon couldn't handle his partner. Tentomon wondered how could this idiot be considered so smart. All he does is obsess over his computer, and it bothers Tentomon as much if not more than the normal group.
"Izzy, it's hurting too badly, please stop it." Izzy stopped as Tentomon asked, and turned of his computer. It wasn't over Tentomon, but something he was noticing on the wall. It was actually important, and something he knew he look at. Then take note of it, and tell the others about it.
Tai, Sora, and I were escaping Andromon and his attack, but for some reason, we were going as slow as possible.
'Can we go just a little bit faster?" I asked, because Andromon was right behind was. Not even five feet away.
"Electro Spike!" Andromon yelled, and shoot a spike spinning at a deadly fast pace towards us. I grabbed them, and dragged them to the wall.
"See what I mean?" I asked, and held hands with Tai, then I made him hold hands with Sora. Then I put Gomamon on top of my shoulder. Agumon on top of Tai's. Then Biyomon on to of Sora's shoulder last. Andromon was getting closer, so I had to move and act faster.
"If we go like this, then we could run by faster, and nobody would be forced behind of ahead. Then we could stick together, and get out of this hopefully decently well." I told them, and started running as the lead. It surprisingly worked, for a tactic that was just pure winging it. We were now on a bridge, and could see down into the machinery room. Matt, Mimi, and T.K. were looking up at us, and gave us a 'why aren't you running for your stupid miserable life's' face. Andromon shot us again with his attack that changed his hand into a Electro Spike attack again.
"This is a stupid idea, I know this, but we must do it." Tai said, and I hoped that he knew what he was talking about.
"What is it Tai?" Sora asked, and Tai looked down. Wondering if the other were going to do anything.
"We jump down, and reach the machinery part of the room. That will make the landing easier. I will go first, since it is my idea. If I fail, then you all must do something else. We go with our digimon, and hopefully make it." Tai said, and grabbed Agumon, then jumped down the rail. He rolled on the ground, and looked hurt for a moment. Then got up, and yelled up at us.
"It's alright. Just hurts for a moment." Tai told us, and I looked at Sora.
"You go first. If you make it, it won't matter if I don't. Besides, I will b able to hold Andromon off for a couple seconds. Which can get you and the others out of the room, then find Izzy. And leave the factory. This is my task towards you if I don't make it. Then tell Matt, is the next oldest, he will have the leadership role if I don't make it." I said, and Sora looked terrified. Then she nodded, showing that she knew this was the right thing to do.
"I will trust what you say." Sora said, and jumped down with Biyomon. I looked at Andromon. I had to do the math just right. If I jump right as the Electro Spike reached me, then I could jump, and assure myself avoiding it. So I just had to wait.
"Electro Spike!" Andromon yelled, and I grabbed Gomamon and jumped down right when the static spike was within inches of my body. I reached the ground, and got up a few seconds later. Then looked at the others. Then Andromon jumped down, and advanced towards us. I knew that we were out of options. I had to think of something, or t was all lost.
Izzy was checking out the symbols in the chamber, and seeing if they had any knowledge to give him. Tentomon was asking him what he was looking for. But Izzy just kept on pretending like Tentomon wasn't even there. Tentomon started to grab onto Izzy's clothes, to make him notice at last, and it worked.
"Why are you distracting me from my work?" Tentomon stepped back, looking hurt by how Izzy was treating him.
"I thought that we were friends. Yet you won't even pay attention to what I have to tell you. God, you're just such a control freak!" Izzy looked into Tentomons eyes, and saw the pain he was putting onto his digimon.
"I'm so sorry, Tentomon. How can I make it up to you?" Izzy apologized, meaning it. Then he remembered that he still had to focus on the thing on the wall he had just saw.
"You can help me get back to your friends, they probably want to know what you've been up to." Izzy put his hand up to his chin and thought deeply for a couple of seconds.
"Okay, you're probably right, but let me check one last thing out." He took out some white-out and used it on one of the symbols on the wall. All the lights in the factory went out. Then there was smoke on the walls, and the images that he had thought he saw started moving around.
In the images, he saw a village. Pictures of digimon walking around, in happiness, and a human. He was brave, and helped out all the digimon at every chance they got. Then he had lost his personal digimon, and another man came to him. Gave him a offer, and the good man protecting the digimon had muscles added onto him. Then he was able to help out the digimon more, and they loved him more. Then a dark force started coming towards him, and he fought the darkness. He won, but it came back bigger. Part of the first part consumed him, but he defeated the second launch. More got to him, and a third part came towards him. He defeated it, with more darkness on him. Then a fourth part came at him, and it overpowered him. Then the man started changing his appearance, and had gotten a new look. It was one of a black face and red eyes, and laughing at Izzy. There was one word coming out. It was 'Ken.' That one word echoed around the room for nearly a minute, before stopping.
Izzy fell on the ground, and looked at Tentomon. Then ran to his digimon.
"That was terrible." Izzy said, and remade the signs on the wall. Then the places in the factory started working back like normal.
Matt, Mimi, T.K., Tai, Sora and myself were surprised by this. All the machines stopped working the second the lights turned of. Then turned back on as if it never happened. Even Andromon stopped in confusion, and we had a short chance. Even though we didn't take it.
"What just happened?" Matt asked out loud, but not really to anybody in particular. Due to the fact that we all wanted to know the same thing.
"What if Izzy had something to do with it?" T.K. asked, and I almost forgot about Izzy for a moment. But T.K. had a great point.
"At best, he will make it out alive if we don't." Sora said, and I hoped that we didn't have to go this far. But she had a point.
"This factory is getting scary." Mimi said, and for once, I wasn't annoyed by what she said. Probably because of the nice talk we had the night before. That was still nice.
"Andromon is getting closer to us." I said, and Tai gave me a sad, desperate look. Like he was going to give himself up. I was not fond of his face, and was already fearing what he might do.
"I will give myself up, and you can escape." Tai said, and walked towards Andromon. I ran up to him, and tried pulling him back.
"Joe, stop it. I decided to do this, and you should respect this choice I made." Tai said, and I sighed. Giving in. Andromon smiled, and was about to strike.
Izzy looked curious by what just happened.
"Izzy, we should try to find the others. They are probably wondering where we are." Tentomon said, and Izzy knew that Tentomon was speaking the truth.
"You're telling the truth. We should leave now." Izzy said, and started looking for us. He ran down the halls, and saw destroyed parts from Andrmon. Like a war machine was going around the entire factory. Andromon felt like war machine. He ran closer to us, as he could tell from our voices, and Andrmon's about to attack Tai. He reached the others, and yelled at Andromon to stop the attack right away.
Andromon had all seven of us cornered, and then Tai and Matts devices glowed. This put a stop to Andrmon about to attack Tai, and possibly killing him. Nice that the digimon came through at the last second.
"Agumon digivolve to…. GREYMON!" Agumon yelled, this was the second time that this happened to Agumon.
"Gabumon digivolve to…. GARURUMON!" Gabumon Yelled after Agumon, this was also the second time I saw this happen to Gabumon.
"Novablast!" Greymon yelled, but Andromon defected it. Greymon was running towards Andromon, and was going at a much faster pace than Andrmon. Maybe we had hope in this. I just hoped that Greymon would win. He grabbed onto Greymon, spun it around a little bit, and threw Greymon into the wall.
"Roaring Blaster!" Garurumon yelled, and Andromon did the same thing that he did to Greymon. This time, since Andromon already did it once, he didn't need any getting ready. Just slammed Garurumon down the same way twice as fast. Andromon felt undefeatable. Izzy took out his computer and the weird messages and big letters showed up again. Tentomon started burning again, but he knew what Izzy was doing.
"I think this might have something to do with digivolution. Tentomon, look, my device is glowing. I will have to try this out at least." It fully glowed and Tentomon was now glowing instead of burning.
"Tentomon Digivolved to…. KABUTERIMON!" It was a big blue bug that had its mouth wide open. It shoots out electricity from its four arms to attack its enemy. I saw a black gear on Andromon's knee, like the one on Meramon.
"Kabuterimon shoot your electricity to his knees, I can see a black gear on it." I said. Kabuterimon looked at me, and nodded towards my command.
"Your commands as are important as Izzy's." Kabuterimon said, and started getting ready for attack.
"Electro Shocker!" It yelled, and pink electricity went towards Andromon, and the black gear was destroyed.
"Thank you for destroying my black gear. I know a way out of the factory, just go out that tunnel." Andromon said, and couple minutes later. We gave him the chance to recover first, and then ask for help. He pointed to a tunnel, and I thanked him for his kindness, well, after that incident. We all went into the tunnel, and were ready to continue. Mimi was the last one to get into the tunnel, because she didn't want to jumped down like six inches.
"Mimi, come on. We need you to get down, so we could move on." I said, and she listened. I took this as a time to think of our progress. Now four of our digimon have went from the rookie to champion stage. Tai has Agumon turn into Greymon. Matt has Gabumon turn into Garurumon. Sora has Biyomon turn into Birdramon. Now Izzy has Tentomon turn into Kabuterimon. Three of us were left. Mimi and her Palmon. T.K. and his Patamon. Lastly, there was Gomamon and I.
"What art thou thinking 'bout?" Gomamon asked me in a curious sort of way.
"Nothing much, just your guy's digivolutions. All the ones we've seen so far. As well as the ones we haven't, and what they might possibly turn into. Mainly about you, it's going to be very interesting." Everybody laughed, even Matt had a little laugh at this. This was all starting to go well. I know I said this so many times now, but I can't help but state that every time I think about it. But it keeps better each time we encounter something. It brings us together more ach time. I care about these people now, not just in the consoler way, in the friendly way. Like older brother in a way. I just hope the others feel the same way towards me. Tai came through today, and Izzy did. I will have to bring that jar to the village we see still. I haven't forgotten about that. Also want to figure out the point in the picture. Then I decided that it was a good time to stop for the day. I even suggested it.
"Guys, let's stop for the night." I said, and the others looked like they didn't mind.
"We don't know what time it is, or how long we have been in there, so I guess we could stop for the night." T.K. of all people consented. We got our stuff ready, and had dinner.
"Quite the day that was." Izzy said, and we all agreed inside.
"I hope we can leave soon. This is starting to freak me out. Like something really bad is going to happen." Tai said, and I looked at the others faces. Sora looked sad, and Matt had a look of dawning realization on his face.
"You are right Tai." Matt said, and that was enough for him to state what he was thinking.
"I never told my parents good bye." Mimi said, and I felt bad for her. "I just left the car, and didn't say anything. Why couldn't I get good closure on my relationships with my family?' Mimi asked, and looked at the flames.
"Don't worry Mimi. Not everybody gets good closure, not trying to excuse it or anything. Just looking at it in a general subject." Sora supported her friend, and Mimi smiled.
"Thanks Sora." Mimi said, and I felt it was my turn to say something.
"I couldn't talk to my brother Jim about what I promised I would. I didn't talk to my dad what I wanted to do with my life. So I have those things to think about." I said, and got all our bed materials ready. "Let's get some sleep." I said, and we all went to bed. I could tell they needed it badly.
That night I had a weird dream. It switched to a couple different focuses.
-In my dream, there was a top of the mountain, the evil digimon was still looking at us.
"Four of the seven have digivolved. I really need to take them seriously now. I also need to double up my use of black gears. Maybe even separate them all if this keeps us. It might be the only way for me to win and for my nation to be born." The evil digimon said. "Daemon, come." A digimon, even more evil if possible than this one came out of the shadows.
"What is it you want master?" the second digimon asked, and the evil digimon laughed.
"Get inside the council. Learn about their motives. Maybe get a cult ready to assassinate the head of council in due time." The evil digimon said, and the second digimon nodded in obedience.
"Yes master." The second digimon said, and left his master.-
----
Chapter 8: Togemon In Toy Town
We were now inside of the sewers now, wandering through them to find some sunlight again. It was obvious that everybody was tired, and not wanting to walk too much anymore, but Tai and I kept on telling them we needed to.
"I can brighten up the mood by singing for us a little bit." Mimi said, "I took some singing lessons to make me better at it." Everybody let her do her own thing.
"Why does it feel like night today?
Something's here is not right today.
Why am I so uptight today?
I don't what stressed me first
Or how the pressure was fed.
But I know what it feels like
To have a voice inside the back of my head
A face that I hold inside
A face that awakes when I close my eyes
A faces that watches every time I lie
A face that laughs every time I fall
(And watches everything)." Mimi sang.
"What do you think of that?" Mimi asked everybody.
"Terrible." T.K. said in a matter of fact kind of way.
"That wasn't a song you made. That was the start to Paper cut, a song by Linkin Park." I corrected her wisely; Linkin Park is my favorite band. My favorite album by them is Minutes to Midnight. Sora was holding her face in a don't cry sort of way, before she screamed.
"What's the problem?" Tai asked Sora, in a reassuring sort of way. Sora looked in all of our directions, and tried to apologize.
"It's just that sometimes, when I'm outside doing laundry, I sing my favorite songs. It's the one time I'm allowed to do that, because I'm not inside. My mom says it's distracting when I sing inside. I just miss being home!" She started to cry. I started rubbing her soldiers, to make her feel better. She looked around, and sees that it was I. She blushed a little color of peachy-red.
"How about we all take a moment to just say something that we all miss about our homes, or just our life." Tai suggested, and he started. "I miss playing soccer, and scoring some goals. People even consider me to be the star player of the team." He said, and let out a little bit of a laugh. Along with starting to try to look tough.
"I miss cooking for my father every day when he gets home from his job. We sit at the table and talk about how our day has gone, best part of the day. In my point of view, at least." Matt told us, and I nodded a little. I wish my family relationships are this good. The only person that I'm related to who tries to understand me is my brother. I've never even met some of my grandparents, or uncle/aunt. What was I going to say when they come around to me?
"I miss studying the different sciences of life and the planet of Earth." Izzy said, at least he had something good to go for.
"I miss getting high scores on my video games. I could spend hours playing on some days, it's just so much fun." T.K. said, wow, I've never even played a single video game in my entire life.
"I miss going shopping, on Sundays, they have killer deals. I just go all out on those days. I also miss hanging out with my girlfriends." Mimi said, and I got the message of her saying girlfriends. Crap, it was my turn now, and what was I going to say?
"I miss doing my homework. If I fall behind, I might have to take another year of High School, and I can't bear to live another year of where I'm living at." Matt glared over at my direction, and shook his head. I also saw that he was rolling his eyes. But it was true, I couldn't handle another year with my father, so I spend all night sometimes doing homework. Sometimes I even go two to three nights without sleeping to get all the material in my head. That's when I saw a bunch of blobs running to our direction. Maybe he was disappointed that I didn't have anything better to go for besides homework.
"Tentomon, what are those?" I started to panic as they were headed to us.
"Those are Numemon, they're weak, but the bad smell that they give off makes up for it. The goo that they shoot off might stay on your clothes forever. Just run for it!" I listened to Tentomon's advice, and made a run for the other side of the sewer. Everybody pursued behind me, and we ran through the entrance on the other side in a few minutes. There were two exits, and I picked the one of the left. They followed me, and I got out, with the sunlight beaming right of our eyes. The Numemon couldn't break past the entrance, and I wondered why.
"Hey, why did they stop following us? Is it because of the sunlight?" I asked. I was panting, that was quite a run that we had.
"Yes, it's because they are allergic to the sunlight usually." Tentomon said, and I looked up. I saw a village, it looked rather nice. It had pretty high up buildings. I looked at them, and wanted to see if they wanted to give it a try.
"Want to see it?" I asked, and the others looked like they had nothing better to do.
"Well, I guess we could use a quick break from all that running away that we had to do." Matt said, and walked up besides me. We took the lead, and walked the half mile to the village.
You might be wondering, what did the village exactly look like? Like I said, there were several buildings that went pretty high up. I would assume four story buildings. There were many nice trees in it. We were walking on a stone white bridge, and the water underneath was clean. Like the kind that you find on the pictures near the mountain. I looked around, and didn't see anything running around it or anything. Like everybody was playing their games inside, and their parents were inside making sure that their kids didn't cause any trouble. Just a average day in a nice town, I would think. Then I pulled the other aside, and showed them why I wanted to stop at this village.
"I found something along with Tai and Sora in the factory. I thought it looked rather interesting, and wanted to reach a village, and have something examine it for me." I said, and pulled out the claw in the jar. I didn't open the jar, just in case. "I wonder what this is, and I think that only something in a village could help give me the answer." I passed it to T.K. Since he was the one next to me.
"It looks like a creature that had been lost for thousands of years. Like one extinct from something. In fact, it reminds me of those claws that are on dinosaurs. Not meaning you or anything, Agumon." T.K. examined, and handed it to Sora. Who was next to him.
"I helped Joe find it in the factory, so I guess I don't really need to examine it anymore. I don't really think Tai needs to look at it either, since he already did. So I will hand it to you." Sora said, and handed the claw in the jar to Izzy. Who was next to Sora.
"I never seen anything like it. It's quite interesting. Maybe we should ask something for advice, and see what they have to say about it. It could help us find out about the past of this place a little bit more. Although the fact that none of us considered is that we might never return back here once we leave. It's most likely just going to be a one time thing for us." Izzy said, and looked at Tentomon. Like he was dreading the day that would happen. Like he was getting used to Tentomon, and didn't want to leave the bug behind. I didn't really care one way or another if I left Gomamon or not. I have no real connection with the fish really. Just sort have been tagging along with me. While I have accepted it more than I did at the start, it still feels weird having a talking fish tagging along with me in a world that makes no sense at all. Izzy handed the claw in the jar over to Matt. Who I think is the only who hasn't examined it yet. No wait, there was Mimi to. So two left.
"I'm surprised that nobody has commented on the fact that the claw is red. My question is, how did it get in a jar, and why is it in a jar? Out of all things to put it in, they put it in a jar. Which could break over any sort of Earthquake. Just doesn't sound that smart, if you ask me personally." Matt said, and shrugged. He handed it to Mimi, who was the only one who hasn't examined it yet. I figured that she was going to make a stupid comment on how dirty it was, and I already not excited over what she was going to say. I was wrong, she actually gave a half decent comment.
"If you ask me, it actually looked like something that you would find in a museum. But Matt's good point that he made is the fact that it is red. I don't think I ever seen a claw before that was red." Mimi said, and got up. She looked at the trees, after putting the jar down. I picked it up, and went up to her.
"Just looking at the tree. It looks nice, and like something that you would find inside of a book." Mimi said, and touched it. "It feels hard and rough. Like pages of a old book." The tree was sort of blue, but not too noticeable until you walked directly in front of it. The leaves were green as usual, so nothing besides the sort of blue texture was too outlandish about it. Then I saw a digimon in front of us.
"You should go to the inn. I heard there was a visitor that never goes here often has shown up again. I can't believe that I'm seeing a human. This is the first time in my entire life, despite hearing about them several times." The digimon said, and I could tell by its eyes, that it was just a baby. Maybe no older than eight. I walked up to the others, and Mimi was right behind me. She looked like she was trying to grab my hand, but I didn't quite want her to do that. Something about hand contact just didn't seem right.
"Hey, I heard from this little kid digimon that there was a strange visitor at this inn." I said, and looked at the buildings. Looking for the inn. I checked about five places before I found it. 'The Rivertell Inn." Was what it had said on the board. I looked at the others. "I found it, if you want to see." Izzy got up, and went towards it. Before he stopped, and tried calling us to him.
"Maybe Joe can get his answer about the claw in the jar if we see this strange guest. I think it is worth a shot." Izzy said, and I walked towards him first. Then Mimi, Matt, Sora, Tai, and T.K. was in the back. I could see that he was debating it to himself, and decided to do it anyways. Since he was clearly on the opposing side that wouldn't win if you look at it in this way. Izzy was the first inside, and there were easily thirty or forty digimon in there. All of different creatures, and sizes and colors. I sat down next to Izzy, who was sitting on a stool in front of the owner. Everybody else filled up a stool, until all was taken, and T.K. had the last one.
"I heard there was this strange visitor here. Do you know where they are?" Izzy asked, and the inn owner pointed towards one of the back tables.
"His name is Ignitemon. He comes here very once in a while. Maybe for a day or two, then leaves, and doesn't come back for a year or two. Then shows up again, like he wasn't ever gone at all." The inns owner replied, and I got up.
"Thanks." I said, and we walked towards the table. "I wonder why they leave so much, and randomly sees this place." I said, and sat down at one of the chairs. The digimon looked up at me, and looked back down.
"Humans. I don't know what I should say about them. Maybe I would have to see them for myself before I can make true judgment." It said, and got up. "Meet me in my room, first one on the right on the second floor." I stood there, after they left, and looked at the others.
"Want to take their offer?" I said, starting to follow them. They slowly got up, starting with T.K., then Matt, Sora, Izzy, Mimi, and Tai. We went up to the room, and walked inside. The digimon was there, waiting for us to show up. When we sat down, they took of the robe over their body, and started talking to us.
"It has been a while since I heard of humans being in the digital world." They said, and started introducing themselves. "My name is Ignitemon, and I have been wandering around the digital world for years now. I seek many answer to some things, but I don't even need to see you to know. To know that you are in danger, each one of you."
"How are we in danger exactly?" T.K. asked, closing the door, so nothing could listen in on us. Ignitemon examined each of us carefully, like we were the holy answer to a long asked question.
"You are what we need. You are n a way just parts of something much bigger. I know I may be speaking a lot, without really explaining myself. But it would be better if I don't explain myself personally, and it would be better if you guys don't either. You are in a way being hunted right now. I can feel by what also." I was totally confused by this now.
"Chased. By what? How can you see this?" I asked, and the Ignitemon glared at us.
"There are seven of them. Shadows coming down from that mountain up there." Ignitemon said, pointing towards a mountain at the far distance. "These shadows have been around for a long time, although they have not shown up for a really long time. They bring cold and sadness to every place they see. They kill everything they see that doesn't help them. They are cold, dreadful creatures." Sighing, Ignitemon continued. "They can't be beat, just outrun. Trust me, I have been around them before. They serve a evil lord that I have seen before, but I think I heard of."
"A master. Who would this master be like, or do you have no idea?" Mimi questioned, and the Ignitemon shook their head madly.
"No, I wouldn't know It's hard to wonder what can be something's master when that is the worst thing you have seen. I need to find safety to you somehow. I don't know, but we need to leave as soon as morning roles over. I will take you to Toy Town, and I will leave you. I might return to see you, but I won't be traveling with you for the rest of your journeys." I got the jar out, and showed it to Ignitemon.
"Yes, before you ask, I have seen this before. Representing a long gone time and era. During the time of rebuilding, after the era of darkness. This claw was handed to each county once they fully rebuilt themselves if not gotten more. This was to show the fact that they had gotten back from where they had been at before. Since the time of darkness was a time when nearly everything was destroyed. The counties, and provinces, and continents as a whole. I never saw it in person, but I heard of those times. One human helped us out, defeat the evil lord of darkness, and rebuild." Ignitemon explained, and handed it back to me. "It truly is a lost piece of treasure, one that would be of extreme value if you sold it, but I would recommend not giving it away, just in case. Might I ask, where did you get this?"
"In a factory. We came out of the sewers under it, and saw this village." I answered, and Ignitemon stopped to think about it.
"Interesting. That factory was the former castle of this county. This one used to be the biggest of the province, until the time of darkness. Even with rebuilding ourselves, this is still the smallest after that. I might have you lost on counties and provinces, but you will know soon. It will be explained to you. But for now, we must worry about the former topic, the seven shadows. Seven of you. It maybe be strange, but what if one represents each of you, but a certain detail throws that off."
"What would that be?" Sora asked, and I felt like the room was getting colder as we were talking. Maybe Ignitemon was speaking correct, and this was the start of something bigger than ourselves. Maybe even something that goes across the entire world we are in.
"I heard rumor, that there is a eighth shadow. More powerful than the rest. The master of the shadows keep this one hidden, but so far, there is nothing that proves this claim. It's just rumor, but nothing confirms against it, so it could still very well be true. I will explain more, I promise. As we are headed to Toy Town tomorrow, or if we ever re meet, then I can go into even more detail." Ignitemon said, and looked at the entire group of us. "I will be watch the entire night. I can see in this time very well, since I was born to see into the night. You guys may do what you want, but make sure to sleep at least some amount. This is so we could make fast progress, and not worry about break. We still have nearly fifteen hours before we need to worry about leaving." Ignitemon said, and we each got up. "Make sure of one thing however, do not get out of this village. We do not want ourselves getting separated. That is the worst thing we can do, and if I can teach you anything, it will be that." Then Ignitemon looked at the window again, and started watching the outside again. Already starting his watch. I got up, and walked out of the room. Tai was sitting down like he was going to do so for a few minutes, before getting up again. Mimi was looking the most stressed of us all, like she was truly worried about how this may turn out. Like she was truly worried about the idea of these shadows more powerful than us chasing us. Bringing cold, dread, and sorrow everywhere. I can see why she would be this way. I am sort of myself. T.K. took out a coin from his pocket, and started flipping it up and down, over and over again. I was watching, as if nothing else in the entire world was interesting at the moment. Izzy was looking out the window from a distance, then looked back at us. As if speaking just wasn't something that was needed, and emotions could be shown by faces. Which is very true, but still pretty hard to do, because they aren't telling you what they think. Matt got up, and walked to the door step.
"I have some money. So I will be going out to the market, and see if there is anything that I think we might need. Sora, can you come with me?" Matt asked, and Sora got up, then walked up to Matt. Ignitemon looked away form the window from the window for a second, and threw a bag at the ground. Matt picked it up.
"That is the money we use inside of there. You should that instead of the money you have." Ignitemon instructed Matt, and went back to looking at the window.
"Thanks. I will try to be back in a hour or two." Matt said, and he headed off with Sora following. I tried to sit there, waiting for them, but after a few minutes of waiting, I wasn't able to just sit down anymore. I got up, and looked at the others.
"I'm just walking around, I will be back soon. I don't know when, but before dark at least." I told them, and then T.K. got right up. He walked to me, and at the others to.
"I will be heading out with Joe." T.K. said, and I shrugged. Not really caring if he went or not, then we left as well. When we were out, I started just walking around the village. T.K. was right next to me, looking like he was debating what kind of thing he wanted to talk about. I was waiting for him to make the move, to see where he wants to take this.
"So, how is high school like?" He asked, and for the first time since I met him, I felt like there was honest anger in his voice. I knew him for nearly six years, including the time he lived near us. I knew he must have sounded angry, because of the fact he was held back and had to repeat fourth grade because of the fact that this was the year his parents got divorced.
"Not nearly the hype everybody gives it out to be. Trust me on that one, please. It just makes you take even more hours out of your good life to study. Inside and outside of class. I know middle school does that, but high school does it even more than middle school does it even. I don't like it one bit, and the people in my class don't make it any better." I answered with what I had experienced, and I bet that he might have a different one, so I wanted to address that to. "Not saying that yours will turn out the same exact way."
"Well, still, at least somebody gave me a strait forwards answer for once, instead of the usual it's how you make it. It can be fun if you make it or not. That answer gets really old after a while, and I want more." T.K. responded, and we continued walking. Thinking that it was not my turn to think of something to talk about.
Matt and Sora were in the market, looking for stuff to buy. Sora was glancing at Matt, as if wondering what he was thinking about.
"Matt what's on your mind?" Sora asked, and Matt seemed felt like although this question has been asked to him many times before, that it still makes him stop when he hears it.
"I… I don't… I don't know. Sorry for answering like that. But talking to people like that for some reason still makes me have to stop when I hear it. My fault. I wonder what would be good for us to get for the group. Like stuff that we need on the road." Matt said, and looked at the isles of items.
"You know, since Joe had a medical bag, we could get some stuff like that. Then maybe some water, and food that can last us all on the road. My personal preference though." Sora answered, and Matt looked at her, like she had just answered a thousand questions in one.
"Thanks Sora, let's go there for now. You really are a great help. Your mother should be proud of you, that you can be so good to your friends and helpers." Matt told her, and they walked over to the isles of the medical gear. "Ignitemon never gave us a budget, so I guess we can use as much as we need." Matt started looking through the stuff, and Sora was doing so along with him.
"Matt, since I tried asking T.K. about his mom, and he wasn't that well on answering it, can you explain your situation with your father?" Sora asked, and Matt looked glad. That somebody was looking at him as something else than the former head of the house.
"My dad is a average man, and I like that. A normal guy who works at the news station, doesn't do anything too crazy. Just his job, and he goes home everyday, sometimes cooking something for me. Sometimes I cook something for him we just switch around." Matt started. "He is the second manager of the business. So when the top manager is gone, he is the one in charge until the first manager returns. Kind of like a office position, and other places out there."
"My mom just owns a normal run of the mill flower shop. Nothing too special, but she gets sells. So we get enough money to keep the house ours at least. Not by much, but enough. Her normal wage is twenty thousand a year, plus how much she earns from purchases, minus the normal fees that we always have. So one a good year, she can earn nearly double her annual wage, forty thousand, and on lower years, she barely earns any more than her twenty thousand. But on the normal years, she earns about twenty either thousand." Sora explained, and Matt had to think about his parents wages.
"I think my dad earns about fifty five thousand a year. Probably not correct, but a honest guess on my part. I have no clue what my mother would earn, not because she lives away, but due to the fact that she is a writer yearly. So she has earns royalty's that could give her even more than fifty five thousand on some years, if she is lucky." Matt explained, picking out some things for the medical bag. Sora looked at the shelf herself, and picked out some stuff on her. Then they looked around, and picked out all the drinks and food that they thought would last us a week or two. As well as sleeping bags, and fire gear. Then some batteries, and flash lights, and lanterns. Pretty much everything they thought we needed. Then they went to the counter, and showed the counter digimon the items, and they checked them out. Once Matt and Sora walked out the store, they looked at the stuff they got, and decided to take this as a chance to talk to each other even more.
T.K. and I were walking around, and found some nice looking birds. Ones that were red, and black streaks on the top. I think this one might be real on earth, but I wouldn't know.
"Do you have any friend?" I asked my question, taking my turn in the question and answer time we were having. T.K. stopped, and looked like he had the face of counting all of them.
"Only a couple, nothing really big. I have one my grade, his name is Davis. I known him since I was like, eleven." T.K. answered, and I felt something hit me. Not literally but like in the inside. Like the name in the dream I had last night, a kid named Davis, who was T.K.'s age. Whatever, only two things the same, nothing to really go by. I should stop my wondering. "We both don't like this one girl, named Yolei. She is in our grade, and to be honest, not really somebody worth looking up to. Davis says he would rather get a F- on a project over work with her. I mean, I'm not a fan of her, but even I wouldn't push it that far."
"What do you dislike about her?" I asked, thinking it was a legitimate question.
"I don't really want to talk about why I like and dislike people. Just a waste of time, if you ask me. Makes you sound like a whiny little second grader, and I don't want to be thought of as that." T.K. sounded like he was going to shout.
"Calm down." I said.
"Sorry Joe, didn't mean to snap. But everybody else looks at me like that since I'm under five feet." T.K. told me, and I couldn't believe people would judge that stupid. That's one of the dumbest things I ever heard. It was now T.K.'s turn to ask me something.
Matt and Sora were laughing at each others comments, and Sora wanted to ask him something else.
"What was your problem with Joe at first?" Sora asked. Matt gave her a aggravated look, like he didn't really want to expand on this topic that was now dead.
"It was because I live next to him, and I never really seen much of what he could do. I wasn't sure of what he would be like as a consular, I was being careful. I wasn't trying to be a punk, I was like I said being careful. What is he messed up, and gave us serious problems, and possibly got one of us sent to the hospital. I had to be careful. I mean, why was nobody else acting like that, he was only here for a couple minutes, and then this happened. Then we trust him just because he is now head of house. I don't think so." Matt said. "He's decent now… but he still has a ways to go before he has truly proven himself to me at least."
"Everybody deserves a chance, and we were doing just that Matt, giving him a chance. We knew right away that he would either be great, or terrible. He deserved one as much as you did." Sora reminded him, and Matt saw her point now.
"Sora, what did you think of my performance when I was head of house those six weeks?" Matt asked, and Sora sighed.
"Some days you were great. Others were alright. Then some days rolled around, and you weren't that good at all. It just sort of varied. You weren't great, okay, or terrible. It was just depending on the day. If that makes sense." Matt nodded, understanding it just fine.
"I get it. Thanks for answering like a honest person, and not just giving me endless praise that others would have. The only person that would be as brutally honest if not more than you, would be T.K. I like that trait of him sometimes, and others, I hate it and him for it. But I know it's not his fault, it's just how he is." Matt said, and Sora couldn't believe he was saying something bad about T.K., his brother.
T.K. was ready to ask me his question, he had to think to himself first. Since he was debating what he wanted to ask. What he wanted to know next about my life and me.
"Joe, why were you in nice clothes when you showed up to camp?" I was surprised that this was his question, and I couldn't answer for quite a few seconds because it was so surprising.
"I was going on a date." I answered his question slowly, as if the words seemed wrong for some reason. I wouldn't know why though.
"Really, you? With who?" T.K. sounded so surprised, he made my reaction to his question seem normal.
"This girl in my age range named Sarah. You probably wouldn't know her, because of that." I answered, and T.K. saw that I had a good point. He most likely wouldn't know her. I am most likely the only high school senior and eighteen year old he has hung out with for more than thirty minutes by choice.
"Did it go well?"
"It did and it didn't. Yes, because we decided to become friends and that hasn't changed yet. No on the way that we didn't become a official boyfriend girlfriend couple like I had really wanted. But she had a good point, if we broke up, then we might not trust each anymore." I told him, and I was starting to see the sun slowly set. I saw Matt and Sora heading back with a ton of things with them. I saw that they had done a good time getting stuff on their shopping trip. I could see that we might not run out for a while.
"Sorry to cut our nice conversation off so short, but we need to head back to the room the others and Ignitemon are at. Even Matt and Sora are returning." I told T.K., and we got up. We started walking to the inn, and went back to our room.
"Hey guys, all of you got back around the same time. I wasn't expecting that." Mimi admitted to us. Matt and Sora put all the items they had gotten out before us.
"Here is what we got." Sora said, and I looked at each item long and carefully. I saw the medical items, and picked those up.
"I will get those." I said, and put them all in my bag. Since I knew that was the purpose of them getting all of those supplies. Then looked at the food and water.
"Who will take care of having that?" Tai asked, and we all stopped to think about that for a moment. "Does anybody have a backpack? Izzy doesn't count, since he can only his computer in it."
"No, not really." Matt admitted, and Izzy laughed quietly. Probably over our horrible origination. It was kind of funny, in the sense that we are already failing this bad not even a week here.
"I will take care of the problem later. Now you must all stay inside. It is my demand." Ignitemon said, and closed the door. He locked it, and we were forced to be inside for the rest of the day. When I getting near the point of sleep, everybody else was already near sleep. With the exception of Izzy. Instead, he was talking with Ignitemon about something I couldn't really figure out over the increasing coldness. I was glad over the new stuff that Matt and Sora had gotten us for sleepwear. It was nice, and reduced the obvious chilling by quite a big amount.
"I was wondering, what is so special about digivoling aside from the fact that it makes the digimon stronger." Ignitemon was smoking a pipe, but it didn't feel or smell wrong, it just smelt like car refresher.
"Not many know the answer to this Izzy, not even some scholars I know in the Imperial City would be able to help you know this. My best answer is that this hasn't happen much before in the entire existence of the digital world. Not even the most noticed hero of this world had a way of digivolving, much less a digimon. So the fact that you have digimon each of you is already something of a breakthrough for me." Ignitemon said, blowing a star of smoke through his mouth. Sort of reminded me of Gandalf in Lord of Rings. Or the other that had a pipe in general, so like everybody.
"There was a hero of the digital world even before we showed up?" Izzy sounded genuinely interested at this. Even I opened one of my eyes, so I could listen to this better. I was a little interested in it myself.
"Yes, one. He was recorded in many stories and books, but the time doesn't add up. He shows up in almost every event book, despite this world being around for many years. Not even the oldest man alive could do this. So some believe he is merely a legend. Most would agree." Ignitemon explained real brief.
"What experience do you have with the seven shadows?" Izzy asked, considering the fact that Ignitemon spoke like he had known about these creatures from somewhere.
"Brief encounter. Let's leave it at that. It's almost pitch black out. Go to sleep." Ignitemon responded, and Izzy listened. He feel asleep, and I followed secretly.
-In my dream, I was walking down the street with Jim, and we were just talking to each other.
"Jim, can you give me some advice?" I asked, and Jim looked at me with a smile on his face.
"What do you want to ask me about?"
"There is this girl I like. Her name is Sarah. I want your advice with her. Can you give it to me?" I asked, and Jim laughed.
"Don't worry about it. It's just a girl you like. First, you have to learn if they have any interest in you." Jim told me, and I frowned. I hoped he would have given me something else for advice. Something better. I guess he can't help me with everything.
"Okay. Thanks for saying that. I guess you can't help me on everything. Maybe I was thinking of it too much." I said, and we just kept moving on. Then that was the end of that part of my dream.
On the next part, I saw the castle that I have seen many times since we have arrived here. There was that one new being I saw from the last dream in there.
"Master, they are at the end. Do you wish me to send the seven shadows over to them? They can chase down the group, and destroy them all. They are powerful and have been wielded by my fires and anger. They are ready." The being said, and the superior one laughed really loud. So loud that I considered waking up. It felt like a ringing in my ears.
"Daemon, if you think they are ready. Then send them. With these seven shadows, and the black gears, they will be cornered pretty fast. They must be wiped out either all at once, or one by one. Let the night be pierced by the screams of your well creation." The higher being said, and the second being chuckled. Then got up and yelled out loud.
"By my command, shadows go out and hunt these kids down. Even if you must kill everything you see." The one in red commanded, and the higher being was watching these seven things leaving the castle like ghosts getting out of your sight.
"You have done well Daemon. Soon they won't even know what is coming there way." The higher being told the lower one. That was the end of that part.
I was woken up by everybody yelling really loudly. As well as a giant bottle of water being thrown at my stomach.
"Get up! It's morning. I feel the ice shards coming. That is the first sign of the shadows. We must move out now." Ignitemon said, and I got myself up. I picked up the water bottle thrown at me, and all my sleeping materials. I picked the claw in a jar up, and my medical bag. Then some things that others had requested of me to keep a hold of.
"How far away is this Toy Town?" Mimi asked, and Ignitemon looked at her for a brief second before looking away again.
"About a days worth. Two if we take long breaks." Ignitemon responded, and we headed out of the inn. We headed out of the village, and something in my mind told me that this was not the last I would see of this village. Or the last we would see of Ignitemon. Most of all, not the only time that these shadows are going to be a problem to us.
"We must travel fast. Only take breaks when you think that you must use the restroom. All food and water must be consumed while we continue if you are hungry or thirsty. If I am wrong, and it takes more than a day, we must try not to rest at night. That is when the seven shadows are at their strongest. At least at day, we have a chance." Ignitemon instructed, and we all listened silently. Not really wanting to question anything. Just get out of this weird land. We kept going on for a while, wondering if we would reach the village Ignitemon called Toy Town by the end of the day. Around later noon, I would say four or five afternoon, we found a bunch of vending machines.
"I wonder what would be inside of them?" Tai questioned, but Ignitemon stopped him before he could do anything
"Toy Town in close. Do not touch those vending machines, since the seven shadows might have already touched them. Which would make them cursed. If you touch on of their cursed items, then you could possibly die in a matter of hours. But I know the rest of the way. If the teddy bear is in a good mood today."
"Teddy bear?" I asked.
"You will see later." Ignitemon told me, and we kept moving on. After about half a hour later, we saw a giant teddy bear running towards us. It was shooting hearts at us, and Ignitemon looked scared.
"Not in a good mood. But by the red eyes, and red hearts, that the seven shadows have paid this one a visit. Get away. Or else you will be captured. I will have to head out now. I might come across you later, I might not. Fate will decide. But you must separate, it is the only way to escape." Ignitemon told us, and left us alone. The teddy bear was getting close to us, and we listened to his advice. I ran to one side, and the others in different directions. I don't know how long I lasted, or how many was taken by the time the teddy bear caught up to me. I just know that after running for a while, I was caught up with, and captured. Gomamon was quickly taken to. I was escorted to a village, and Gomamon was thrown in a treasure chest. I saw the teddy bear vaguely talking to seven black figures.
"I will keep them in control for the day, and you may do what you please." The teddy bear said, and I heard a loud hiss.
"If you don't, I will destroy some of your toys."
"No, not children's memories. Why would you?"
"Do it, or else we will take this one." A black figured picked up a toy plane. "Don't fail." Then the black figures left.
Mimi was still not caught, in fact, she was the only one. She was running desperately. Palmon was right in pursuit. They kept on running, until they found the toy town Ignitemon was talking about. By mistake, that is.
"This place sure looks happy and cheery. I wonder if the others are here." Mimi questioned, and Palmon had a smile on her face.
"I remember very lightly of this place. I think I might of actually been raised here. Come on, we should go and see if the others are here. I bet we got over the teddy bear by now." Palmon responded.
"Do you know more, or is that all you remember about being raised here?"
"That's about it." Palmon answered Mimi's question. They kept walking forward, and happened to walk into a building. It was the one with the treasure chest.
"I wonder if any fun toys are in here." Mimi and Palmon said in almost perfect unison. Then she walked over to it, and tried opening it. Failed, Mimi tried a second time. Then after three failed tries, she almost left the place in anger.
"Wait!" Mimi heard a voice yell, and it was coming from the treasure chest. Mimi returned to it, wondering if she heard that correctly.
"Was that a voice from the chest?" Mimi asked, and then she heard the voice again. This time louder and more pleading.
"Mimi, it's Agumon. We need your help to get us out of here. The teddy bear is named Monzaemon, and is the owner of the toys in this town. Takes care of lost toys, and loves to play with them. Although it has gotten aggressive now, and locked us all away as well as washing the minds out of the others in the group. We need your help to defeat Monzaemon. So we could be freed, and the others can return to normal." Agumon pleaded, and Mimi looked scared.
"But I don't know if I can do it." Mimi said, and Gabumon said something to her.
"Mimi, it's okay. Just believe in yourself. We believe in you. You are one of our partners, and we want you to get the courage to face Monzaemon." Gabumon tried to cheer her up, and Mimi saw the Monzaemon outside of the building. Searching for her.
"Fine, I will try." Mimi said, and all the digimon in the chest cheered for her. "Palmon, let's try to save our teammates." The two walked out, and Monzaemon locked its eyes towards Mimi. Then started running her at full speed. Mimi stepped to her side, and Palmon went with her.
"I will finish you by the seven shadows command." The Monzaemon told Mimi. Mimi and Palmon started running away from it as it was running at her. She ran behind a building, and waited for a few second for the Monzaemon to leave.
"Who knew that a teddy bear could be scary." Mimi said, and then a part of the house broke off.
"You would think that running behind a house will safe you. You are foolish to think that." Monzaemon said, and was about to take a swing at Palmon. Mimi picked her up, and threw her digimon a few feet back. "The seven shadows wil want nothing less than correct results."
"Palmon, I'm scared." Mimi told her digimon, and Palmon hugged her.
"I will be here for you. I am scared of this Monzaemon to. He is nothing like this normally."
"Say what your desire, I will follow my master orders." Monzaemon said, and struck at Palmon. She rolled across the ground, and Mimi ran towards Palmon.
"Palmon, please don't get hurt. Don't let this digimons blow get to you. I will miss you already." Mimi pleaded, and Palmon smiled at Mimi.
"You would miss me?" Palmon asked, and Mimi nodded very hard. Not stopping, she hoped that this would process through her.
"Please, you're like the little sister I never had. Even if I've only been around you for a few days." Mimi said, and Palmon smiled.
"I guess I will stick around." Mimi cried at that. Not in sadness, but in joy. Joy that her new friend, and as she admitted, little sister she never had was going to stick it out for her. Then she saw her device glow, and that meant that Palmon was ready to digivolve.
"Palmon digivolve… TOGEMON!" Palmon yelled, and started advancing towards Monzaemon. It was a cactus, much bigger than the ones that you would see in the desserts. Plus, it had a mouth and punching gloves.
"You think that I would be scared of a cactus with boxing gloves." Monzaemon said, and attacked them "Heart Attack!" It yelled, and huge bubbles flew towards them. Then started to engulf them. But then Togemon resisted, and popped the bubbles.
"Neddle Spray!" Togemon yelled, and send some needles towards Monzaemon.
"You are better than I thought. Heart Attack!" Monzaemon observed, and attacked once more. This time, Togemon covered them up with her gloves.
"Needle Spray!" Togemon yelled once again, and the Monzaemon was hit in quite a few places. One was in the left eye.
"Oh, you got me. I will still go."
"I don't think so. Needle Spray!" Togemon yelled in response, and sent another volley of needles at Monzaemon. Then something came out of the body. It was another black gear. Then afterwards, the Monzaemon went back to normal.
"I caused this damage." Monzaemon said, freeing us, and looking at the building it destroyed. Then freed the digimon.
"Mimi, you did a great job!" I said, and ran up to her. I hugged her for a quick second, and stopped. "Sorry. Just got over excited."
"It's okay Joe." Mimi said, and the Monzaemon looked at us.
"The seven shadows will show tonight. I will keep you safe by putting you in one of the houses." It said, and opened one of the doors. We walked inside, and sat down. Monzaemon looked at us. "The seven shadows are even worse than Ignitemon said. They kill everything that fails their request. They are forged of death and fear, but they were originally of much more great beings. Go to the library in the Imperial City, and you can read it in a book." Monzaemon gave a final word to us, and left the room.
This was getting worse as it kept progressing. I was starting to worry about myself, and what would happen. I got my phone out, and tried calling Sarah. Few rings, and it failed. Went to message. I gave the message I wanted, and hung up. Mimi looked at Palmon, and looked like she had went through one of the worst things in her life.
"That was terrible." Mimi said, and walked to the kitchen, where nobody was.
"Are you okay?" Palmon asked, and Mimi nodded.
"Just shaken up. If I died, I would have never said good bye to my parents. I love them, and wouldn't handle the idea of not getting closure with them. Or I would have never seen the man I currently have a attraction towards right now. He works with my dad, and they are friends. He's in his thirty's. Known him since I was thirteen and a half." Mimi confessed to Palmon about her current crush. What she didn't know was that she was actually talking about her future husband and father of her son, Anthony, at that current moment.
"I feel like we aren't going to leave for a long time. I feel like this won't be the last we will see of these seven shadows. Do you think that Ignitemon might be right about seven shadows, and one representing each of us?" Izzy said, and T.K., who was sitting next to him, nodded in agreement.
"I think that you are right." T.K. told Izzy, and the silence grew even more uncomfortable at that second right there. Like almost… disturbing. Matt had his knife out, and he was cleaning the dirt off his shoes. Then he put the knife away, and looked out the window.
"I won't let this bother us. If none of us will do something about this, then I will." Matt said, and got up. T.K. tried getting up, and telling him off. Brother to brother, but Matt looked at him. Then T.K sat back down. "Don't try to tell me off. We haven't even seen each other recently until we were sent to camp together."
"What, is it my fault?" T.K. snapped, and walked away from Matt. "Stupid reckless brother." He muttered to himself.
"What did you say?" Tai got in right there.
"Hey, calm down guys. We need to stay together. We will take care of this. When we have improved. Not now. Over time, we will defeat these shadows. We can't have arguments, despite what our pasts may have told of ourselves. Nobody was blaming anybody." Tai reasoned. I was glad that he stepped in. I secretly didn't want to.
"Sorry Matt." T.K. applogized, and Matt forgave him. By giving him a nice hug.
"Apology accepted. Sorry for telling you off. Just we haven't seen each other in so long, and I want to interact with you more." Matt told him, and T.K. shook agreement.
"Let's start." T.K. said, and that was over with. It was getting late, and the sun was out.
"It's been a rough day. Let's call it a night." I said, and everybody agreed. We all got our stuff ready, and went to sleep.
In Toy Town, the seven shadows showed up. Monzaemon was there, waiting.
"Where are they?" One of the shadows asked.
"They never showed up." Monzaemon answered, and the shadows took out a sword. Then got ready to swing it. "Wait, you just said that you would take a toy."
"We change our minds. Besides, you will return soon enough." One of the shadows said, and sliced Monzaemon open. Then they each took turns chopping him up. There was a terrible scream, and I opened my eyes wide awake. I hope they wouldn't see us. They didn't, instead, they rode away. Like that was what they wanted. They killed something, just because a digimon gave themselves up for us. I felt truly bad, and wanted to get angry at something. But I had to keep it together. I went back to sleep.
----
Chapter 9: Ikkakumons Harpoon Torpedo
The next day, we walked out of the streets of Toy Town. We found Monzaemon cut up into several pieces, then a egg in the mess.
"What happened last night?" Mimi asked, looking at all the pieces and egg in the center. I was confused over it myself. Some part of me in the back of my mind said I wouldn't get a answer any time soon.
"I have the feeling something dreadfully evil has come by last night." Izzy told us. I found that comment kind of unneeded, since it should have been plain and obvious something bad happened last night.
"Maybe this egg is supposed to represent Monzaemon starting a new life again. So maybe it will be back soon enough. We never know." T.K. suggested, nobody shot his idea down. Since it had a chance of being real.
"We shouldn't stay here for too long. If we do, these shadows might start chasing us again. Plus, something about this town is starting to really creep me out now." Tai said looking at the egg. We agreed to what he had just said. I looked around, looking for a exit. When I found one on the northeast side of town, we took it. Starting the next part of our journey.
We were walking down the road, looking for a place that might be good for a fifteen minute or so rest. Since we had gone on for a hour or so.
"The snow is starting to get to my heels." Mimi told us, which I also found obvious. I also forgot to mention that it was snowy. It wasn't actually snowing at the moment, but the ground we walked on was covered in it.
"I don't know, this might be the best thing that has happened to us since we first arrived here." Matt muttered under his breath. I silently agreed with him. Despite not being a real fan of snow myself.
Silence for a moment. T.K. was looking at the sky, wondering if it would start actually snowing. "It would be bad if we started again, and then there was even more to this snow problem." He told us, and didn't even take his eyes off the sky while doing so.
"Guys, he's right." I chimed in. Hating this leadership role Eric gave me. But nobody has stepped up to try to take it. I would be glad if they did. "If this falls more than there already is, there would be too much. Then we might possibly get sick from it. The sooner we leave this snowy place, the better for us." I felt like part of me sounded like a little brat.
"Take it easy Joe, they friends art enjoying themselves. Can't thou light up a little bit? It would be more fun if thou did?" Gomamon tried telling me. I looked down at him. Debating if I should dismiss him, or listen to what they are saying. Maybe I would listen to it.
Or I was going to listen to it. That was until Tai made a snowball, and threw it right at Sora. I looked at Tai, glaring.
"What are you thinking? Starting a snow fight when there are these things chasing us now?" I got onto his case. Tai looked at me, as if confused by what I just said. Like I was telling him not to do something I was already doing. It actually confused me.
Nobody had said anything for a while afterwards. Tai would look at me every once in a while, still trying to make sense of what had just happened. Matt just stayed quiet, as if he didn't want to start another argument. Sora looked bored, like she wanted to go home. T.K. was looking at his hands for no reason at all besides possibly they were more interesting. Mimi looked at the snow excited. I assumed that she likes snow, just not that it gets everywhere on her clothes. Izzy was just walking, not saying anything. Just looking ahead of himself. But he was the first to speak up.
"Hey guys look. I think I see a fridge just a few feet away. Just away from the pond over there." He was telling us. I looked at what he was talking about. It looked like one to me. I rubbed my eyes even, and it still looked like a actual fridge. What would it be doing in the open like this?
"Tell me this is just a cruel joke." I told myself, not daring to take my eyes off of it. Worries that it would like vanish away or something if I did looked away from it.
Tai ran over to the fridge himself. Not even telling us that he was going to be doing so. Annoyed, I ran after him. Everybody slowly followed along. Matt being the last of them all.
"I wonder what can be inside." Tai said a little faster than normal, as I was shaking my head wildly. When he opened the fridge door, all we saw were eggs. Hundreds of them, at least. I couldn't believe my eyes. This made no sense. The eggs couldn't be real, and if they were, they would have t be bad.
"I say we should have some for dinner." Tai suggested, and I gave him a worried glance.
"I think we should just leave these eggs here. First, we don't know who owns them. Second, they are most likely bad. Third, it would be rude to take them without permission. Fourth, this could all just be a trap." I gave Tai many reasons why we shouldn't, and just keeping moving on like normal.
"You just worry a tad too much Joe." Matt had told me, grabbing six out of the fridge. Mimi grabbed four. Sora grabbed five. Izzy grabbed three. T.K. grabbed five like Sora. Tai then went in and grabbed seven.
"Fine, I will grab a very minimal amount." I had told them, grabbing two. One for each hand. "Happy now?"
"I'm just fine now." Matt replied, and took all the ones we had grabbed. Then he counted them up. Afterwards, he told us the result. "Thirty-two. It will last us one or two nights. Depending on how we use them."
That was when he has heard a loud screeching noise. That really hurt my ears. I looked back, and saw one of the shadows nearby to us. Like about a hundred yards away.
"Guys follow me! I was the one who got us into this whole egg mess." Tai told us, taking responsibility and lead for now. We followed him, having no other clear or good choice.
We ran down the area as fast as we could. The shadow was getting closer to us, raising their sword to get ready for the strike. Izzy took one of the eggs from Matt, and threw it the way to the shadow. With the impact, they couldn't do anything for a moment. We then took that chance to get further away from it. When he had ran for a while, Matt found a hole. He ran inside of the hole, and we followed along with him.
"We should stay in here until the shadow decides to leave us alone again." Matt wisphered to us. I was glad he was sort of calling the shots, since I would have not been able to say anything.
"You can't hide forever. All of File Island will fall under the other shadows and I is you don't give up. We will hunt you down until you are tired, then we will strike. When you can't stop us." The shadow said in a voice so low and hard to understand, I had to put my head to the edge of the wall. To make the hearing a little better.
Mimi made a quiet, unsure gulping noise. The shadow misheard it, and ran away from us. We waited a minute or so before we got out of the hole. Glad that this was over with, and we could move on.
"I think we should move on now. At least get further away from this thing. It's starting to give me the creeps now." Sora said, looking over at me. She then put a hand on my shoulder. "Do you have any ideas?" She asked, her face getting a tad red. Like from when you put your hand on a stove.
I didn't for a moment. Until I found a sign leading us somewhere.
"Maybe we should try this area." I told everybody else, and we all followed down the path. Until we found a huge rock. Like one so big we could all stand on it just fine big. I looked at it confused. Wondering what we would possibly do with it.
"What the heck is a rock that could possibly be taller than me and no top be doing all the way out here?" I had asked, totally confused. Then I walked closer to it, and rubbed its surface. The part with no top and was flat. T.K. looked at me, as if this were to mean something.
"The sun is up. We barely have any cooking gear. Maybe we could use this rock to cook on it." He suggested, which I found stupid at first. Then slower became more clever the more I had thought about it. Maybe this idea could get us somewhere.
"Might as well give it a try." I replied, not having any idea where this could possibly get us to.
Matt and Sora duoed up to make all the eggs. They talked to each other the whole time. As if to know each other better.
"Matt, what kind of things do you like?" Sora asked him. It felt like he didn't even need to think about it. He already had a answer.
"Music. I like to play and make music on my free time. Make some songs, try them out. See if I like them. If I don't, then I redo the lyrics. Maybe I could make a band someday. If you want, I can sing for you sometime." Matt gave his response, and Sora looked fascinated by this response.
"I would love to hear your songs Matt." She replied. Matt looked as if he wanted to kiss her on the hand, but he decided against it. Not yet, he thought to himself.
Izzy was staring at the rock, and I decided to give a quick hello to him. I haven't really talked one-on-one with him yet.
"Hey Izzy, are you busy? Just wanted to say hello." Izzy looked up at me, then back at the rock again. I sat next to him, breathing in some fresh air as I took the seat.
"Just wanted to talk to you is all really. Seeing as I haven't really interacted with you yet." I said, looking at the same spot of the rock Izzy was.
"But I'm just plain old Izzy. Nothing interesting about me really. I heard you talking to Mimi a couple nights ago."
"No, you're not just plain old Izzy. Yes, I did talk to her a couple nights ago. She's rather pretty, isn't she?" I told him. Then I realized I shouldn't say that. I'm eighteen and she's only fourteen. Not even turning fifteen for several months.
"No, not really. She's decent looking, at best. I'm in her same class. That's how I know her. Despite our height difference, and mine being shorter, I'm actually six months older than her." Izzy made his honest opinion on her looks.
"I think she said something about that to me one. As well as the fact that T.K. should be in your grade level actually. But he was held back once. Is that true?"
"Yeah, he actually is in our same range. But a couple months younger than Mimi. Doesn't really look it, but you should never judge by looks. He was held back on the year his parents got divorced. It has actually left a bigger impact on him than he allows himself to show onto about it. I have parent issues to. He works very hard. In fact, he falls asleep some days in class because he spends so much time doing work at home. Even talked in his sleep once." Izzy told some facts about T.K. to me. T.K. looked at us from the other side of the rock. He must have heard us talking about him.
"What kind of parent issues do you have?" I asked Izzy. Figuring it couldn't be any or at least too much worse than the parent issues I currently have. Then again, everybody has some parent issues in their own way.
'They seem distant. I don't know why though. But when I ask them what made them decide that a kid was good to have, they seem like they wanted to just go home. When they already are. When I ask where, when, and what hospital I was born in, again they seem like something's wrong. I feel as if they are hiding something." Izzy explained, as the food was close to being done.
"How much longer do you think we will be in this strange place? With these strange creatures I honestly kind of don't like." I asked, starting to feel sort of tired. No answer came from Izzy. Maybe he was debating the same subject. I wouldn't be surprised.
"Dinner is almost ready!" Sora yelled, and I guessed the conversation was going to end there. Maybe we should talk again later. Maybe I could ask about his school life next.
We went over to where the others were at. Sat down, and waited for the food to be served. Soon enough, it was. Each with their own thing that they had requested. Mine was being the easiest. Eggs with salt and pepper on it. Everybody else had weird and gross combinations on them.
I don't even remember most of the combinations. But it led to a argument. I remember what was in that though.
"Really guys?" I asked, really grossed out. "Why are you having these combinations? They're so wrong. I mean, eggs on salsa. Don't you know simple is best?"
"Come on Joe, we art hathing fun on purpose. Not like we art being gross on purpose." Gomamon told me, and I wasn't convinced.
"Yeah. It's just messing around. Like we would take any of this seriously. Although it would be interesting to try it out." Tai said, and I had my hands on my face.
"Then why don't you be leader? I never wanted to be. I don't want to be. I never even wanted to be at this camp anyways. What makes you think I possibly want to be in this world over if I never wanted to be at this camp? When are you going to wake up? This is all a load of junk!" I finally broke, and the entire group started at me. Surprised by my snapping moment.
"Doff thou really feel this way Joe?" Gomamon asked, and I looked at it. Feeling I like I could possibly snap even more now.
I slammed the bowl with the eggs down. I knew I was being childish. But at the moment, I didn't care. "Leave me alone. I need to think for a few moments to myself." I got up, heading towards a pond.
I looked into the waters of the pond. Wondering if I had gone a little too far. Even though I was stating my full on and honest opinion. Just something about the way I said it felt wrong. After another ten or so minutes of sitting there, Gomamon came up to me. I looked at it, wondering if I was going to get a lecture. I hoped not.
"Joe." Gommon said, and I looked at it annoyed. Already feeling like the lecture was coming.
"What? Are you going to say I was wrong back there? Because I don't care if you are or not. I was being truthful, and I can have that. Or will everybody look down at me over it?" I realized that my snappy mood wasn't quite over with yet.
"Joe, I get that. Thou doff not need worry over that. But I still wanted to talk to thee alone and personal." Gomamon said, while I was letting out a huge sigh. Wondering how much longer this was going to have to last.
"What do you want to talk about now?" I asked impatient. Still wanting this to end soon. Because I was already getting tired of it. And we've only talked a minute.
"It's just, I'm worried about thee. Thou art trying too hard to be a good team member. Thou need to rely on on other people as well. If thou doth not, then thee might not be well enough to keep going after a while." Gomamon told me, and I had to stop and think for a moment. Maybe it did have a point here. Maybe I am putting too much on myself here.
"Maybe you're right. But you still are falling short of getting it. This is the first time I honestly feel useful. Being in this group. But now it feels like people are starting to not need me anymore. That just makes me feel sad." I said, not even taking my eyes off the water. Which I knew was rude, but a part of me didn't even care.
"I doff not understand." Gomamon replied also staring into the water like me. Will this digimon, pretty much destined to be my partner, ever get it? Or maybe it got it, and was thinking over something different. Now I wasn't so sure about it anymore.
"Now you got me confused." I mumbled. This was going to require a lot of getting used to if this was what I was going to have to deal with. I started a little while longer at the water, and then I got up to seek the others. But Gomamon stopped for a little last note.
"Joe." Gomamon called, and I glanced over at it. "Please take it easy from now on. Let's go back together." I agreed, and we went back back to the others together.
Right away, I knew something was wrong. I saw Matt and Tai arguing. Wondering why, I walked over to the others, who also stared pretty confused. At least I wasn't the only one right now.
"We have to go up that mountain. It's right there, so it might be out best route for now." Tai said, and I was already trying to piece this together. Something about a mountain.
"What are they going on about?" I asked, just to be sure. I wasn't even directing it to anybody at once. I just wanted a basic answer.
"I say that we shouldn't. We might get stuck. Plus genius, we have no climbing gear. How would we get up normally? Besides, nobody else has said anything yet. We need their opinions to." Matt told Tai before anybody could answer my question. I was annoyed just hearing this.
"They are debating to climb this mountain or not. As you might have seen, Tai says we should. While Matt says that we shouldn't. Nobody else has said anything yet. Because we don't want to get involved." Izzy told me, and I nodded in their direction. I was trying to figure out who had the better idea in my thoughts. They both had good and bad points from the little I did hear. I was going to do it. I was going to be a part of this now. Even if it's just to make a simple idea.
I walked up to the two of them. "Guys, we shouldn't be arguing over this. We should stop yelling, and discuss it fairly. Maybe I can give some insight here." They both turned towards me, wondering what I was going to say. Who I favored in this.
"Joe, who do you think is right?" Matt asked, and I nearly gave up there. I had no clue what to say anymore. I messed up, and I couldn't get myself out of this one easily.
"I don't really know. You both have some valid points that we need to consider. But I can't really explain how or why that is either." I said, and made it even worse for myself just by letting those words out of my mouth.
"So you pretty much decided to butt into our talk just to make it longer? Not cool, Joe. Stop trying so hard, makes you look like a fool more than anything when you put this much effort into it." Tai questioned, and started talking to Matt again. As if I didn't exist anymore.
I listened for a while, before I felt I just couldn't handle it anymore. I snapped once again. "Stop arguing! You're not helping anybody. Let's just all agree you guys all vote next morning. I say we stay here tonight. But I shouldn't vote, since I have other things to do and worry about." I looked at the mountain. My choice was made. I will just wait until everybody was asleep to do it though.
"Fine." Matt and Tai said to me at once, and we all started getting ready for camp. We had no tents, just sleeping bags and pillows. T.K. knew how to set up sleeping bags pretty well since he told us that he used them quite a bite. But he didn't really take the time to explain how or why. But we still let it happen. Since they were set up pretty easy from him.
Every body went to one, and slowly started to fall asleep. I was almost there when I heard two people talking. They were Tai and Sora. I know it's rude to listen in on peoples talks, but I decided to listen in anyways.
"Thanks for that talk a couple days ago. It feels like we've been here a week already. The other campers must be worried by now. I'm surprised by Joe' snapping moment." Tai said looking directly in her eyes. Like she was the only person in the entire world who mattered. I think that was just because of the fact he was talking to her.
"You're welcome Tai, I liked it also. It has actually felt that long when I come to think about it now. Interesting though, how we are best friends and we find ourselves to still be talking to each other even over all these events." Sora replied as if she were thinking of the same problem. Or at least within the same league of it. Tai had a rather strange question in his mind. It was strange for a few reasons. Them being great friends by itself was one.
"Sora, what has been the best birthday present you have ever gotten?" Tai asked, looking somewhat away when he asked this one. Because he felt he should already have a clue on this ones answer.
"A little over five years ago, when I was ten. My mother said that she cared about me and wanted me to let her in. Saying a new decade of my life is always a true fresh start. Along with birthdays as normal and New Years day. She gave me the entire Lord of Rings set, Hobbit, and the Silmarillion. I haven't really ever really read any of it yet, but she spent so much money into it, I knew she put in true effort for this gift. So for that, I will always love those books. Even if I don't ever really read them." Sora told Tai, as he was obviously thinking about his answer. What he would say. Then he snapped his fingers like a answer was now clear.
"My eleventh birthday four years ago. Before my parents got into several arguments for a year period of time. My father and mother put all their money together and bought me a gaming system. All I got game wise was just the original Mario games. But since then, I've extended my collection. Like Zelda for example." Tai said as if he was thinking back to the good old days when he had the innocence of the youth. I guessed I missed those type of days to.
"Well sorry to cut this off Tai, but I think we should get to sleep now." Sora said as she put herself in her sleeping bag. Tai sat quietly for a couple minutes before putting himself in his own sleeping bag. I silently followed their examples, and then I went back to sleep
-In my dream, I was imagining walking home one day from school. My dad was in the living room, crying miserably. I ran up to him, wondering what was wrong. I didn't want to see him like this, even with all he put me through.
"Dad, what's wrong? Talk to me. Please." I looked at him worried I was falling for some kind of trick. He looked at me looking honestly miserable. I embraced him, not caring over all he said or done before now.
"Joe, I got a call from the hospital. It's about Jim. The doctor said he got hit by a car a hour ago. It killed him on impact. Made me open my eyes and see how horrible of a parent I've been. I'm sorry for everything. Will you give me a second chance? He now hugged me. I was breathless because of the news of Jim and the apology.
"Yes. I will give you a second chance." I didn't know what came to me. Maybe I thought even the worst of people could be redeemed. Or maybe I was so struck by the news of Jim's death that I just took anything thrown at me. But I let go of the hug, and walked slowly towards my room. My dad running after me, but stopped.
I went over to a drawer, and took out a gun. My dream self looked at it for a moment. I put it up to my head, and fired. My dead body falling down to the ground, creating a loud thud.
My father ran into the room. When he saw my body, he fell on the ground in grief. He picked up my lifeless body, and cried immensely.
"Why? I though you forgave me. I'm sorry I failed you and Jim. Now I'm alone forever." My father said in emotional agony. It showed him crying on my body for about a minute before the dream ended. I decided then, that in real life, I would become a doctor. On one condition. If Jim died before I got a carer. That way, I can do health and save people from family loss. But that will be the one way I will willingly become one.-
I woke up and it was late at night. But it felt like I was asleep for about a hour. I looked up at the mountain, and decided to climb it. Right now and all alone.
I wrote a quick note telling them my situation. It was the least they deserved. This was the note I had made for them read.
I'm going to climb up this mountain.
Let's call it Infinity Mountain.
I don't know when I want to be back.
But I want to go on this walk alone.
From Joe Kido
I started leaving the sleeping grounds. This was the right to do, I kept telling myself in a loop. At the front of the mountain a voice called out to get my attention.
"Joe, what art thou doing now?" The voice said, and I looked back to see who it was. I noticed that it was Gomamon. My partner digimon. I looked back at it, a little annoyed. Yes, it was my partner and everything. But I needed a break from it sometimes.
"I was planning to go up on a hike alone. For no reason really." I didn't really want to say that it was just really to see if there was anything worth checking out or not.
"I will come with thou then." Gomamon said, as I rolled my eyes. I honestly didn't want Gomamon to come with me, but I gave in.
"I guess we will together then." I replied, sighing. Gomamon reached me and got on my back, and we started out hike up.
It was nearing morning when Sora woke up and noticed my little note for them. She didn't freak out or anything, but she did wake everybody else up to see what they had to say.
"I still won't to go up this mountain. I know Joe is in danger, but this is a bad sign. How about this, everybody who wants to go up may. While we all wait until you guys come down." Matt said when he was fully awake. If only I knew who right he was.
"Okay. I will be fine with us doing it that way. I will go up the mountain and anybody else who wants to help me save Joe can come with me." Tai went up to the foot of the mountain as he was saying this. Only Sora joined him, while everybody else stayed behind.
"We will be back soon" Sora assured them as they commanded Agumon and Biyomon to digivolve. The two best friends started going up the mountain. Matt ran a few steps forward, but stopped when they were out of range. He fell down in defeat.
"Tai, please keep Sora safe." Matt wisphered under his breath. Like he was hiding something he wanted to say.
Our climb up the mountain was a rather interesting one. We helped each other when one was about to mess up. Like Gomamon did its part, and I did mine.
Like at one part, when a twenty foot hill was over us, I climbed up it, and and Gomamon was on my back so it wouldn't fall off. At the top of that hill, I was taking a few deep breaths as a break.
"Thou art actually a pretty good climber. Did thou get lessons from somebody?" That question made me have to think a little while back. When Jim taught me how to climb up tress and other big things constantly over the last five years.
"My older brother helped me with this. His name is Jim. One day, without explanation, he was a expert climber. That was around five years ago. He has been helping me learn how to climb really big things such as this ever since then. That was also when he started to devote himself to losing all the weight has had put on over time. But I never asked how or why he became so amazing at it out of nowhere." I told Gomamon, taking one last nice deep breath in this fresh air.
"Doth thou like thee brother?" Gomamon questioned as if I might have been lying to myself about something all this time. But I already had the answer.
"Yes Gomamon, I do. He is like the one person I am sure of that I like." I got up, and Gomamon got itself in their walking position again. Our quest up the mountain now continued.
So we walked up for another few minutes. We must have been going up for a really long time, because I could barely see any tress or normal ground below me. I must have been near the top. But what made us stop to take another break another break from going up was a huge stream of water going down from a huge hole. I didn't realize how thirsty I was until I saw that. Gomamon and I walked up up to it.
I cupped my hand around the water, and drank what I had in my hand. Gomamon sipped it for a little bit. Until something was flying towards us. I looked to see what it was. Looked like a unicorn with a red helmet covering its eyes.
"Look. It's Unimon. I question why it is up here right now." Gomamon said as it flew to the water. I saw something black in its back, and and I assumed that it was nothing at the moment. Of course like everything, I was wrong.
"Hello Unimon. How art thou doing? Art thou taking a break from a long ride?" If Gomamon never spoke up, we would have been just fine. But the Unimon turned right at us. With a loud scream, I knew this wasn't going to be a friendly meeting.
At the main camp, Matt was getting a breakfast fire going. All was going decently well until Izzy heard a cracking noise. Not like the ones in the movies and shows though, It was more of a warning crack. Izzy wondered what it was and for good reasoning to.
Izzy got up and saw something running by. He raised his device up looking around to see what it was, or is he was just imagining things. A small sweat going down his face, and he took a deep breath. Ready to face whatever it was.
One of the seven shadows jumped out and surprised all of them. Even Izzy wasn't expecting or at least waiting for it to be one of the terrors they had been trying to escape from for two days.
T.K. slowly backed away from the situation since nobody was looking at him to stop him from doing so. But when he started full on running, he fell down a hill. At the bottom, he realized Patomon wasn't there with him. Several of the black army that Daemon has secretly been inventing were waiting for him. He knew this encounter was going to have to be done alone, and that he was going to need to be smart instead of violent to win this one out.
T.K. thought of a way that he could defeat the servants without having Patomon require digivolution, or even Patomon there at all. Just his mind.
He picked up a fallen tree branch and was going to use that as his defense for this fight. Or at least the start of it. He picked the servant furthest to the right to right first.
The servant looked at him and raised their weapon for fighting. It was a large club with some spikes on it. T.K. swung the branch on its leg. With a loud roar, they ran at T.K. swing its club around.
That was when T.K. ran the branch right through the servant. With a part of it sticking out of the body. Grabbing the branch in a taunting way it exploded. With that one taken care of, he now had seven left to fight.
He exchanged the branch for the club the first servant he fought used. He swung it around a little bit, hitting one of the spikes into another of the servants head by mistake. It exploded like the first one, and he still had six to defeat.
One of the other servants hit him in the arm using their hands. He grabbed the arm that hit him and and pushed the servant into the ground. He swung the club across its chest, making the third explosion. Giving him now five to defeat.
Two more ran up to him. One on each of his sides. T.K. knew that he wasn't going to need any weapon to get rid of these two. He raised his arms, and when the servants got close to him, he slammed the heads of each servant onto each other. By doing so, he kicked them around, leading to their explosions. That left three for him to now take care of.
It got progressively harder from there. Instead of one of them running, they waited for T.K. to make the first move. By doing so, he made the move by running towards it. The servant hit T.K. hard, making him fall to the ground. He jumped back up, and shoved the club into the servant with all this effort. With that being done, it exploded. With that, there were two left. T.K. was now getting tired from all this fighting.
The next one that ran up to him was even larger than the other six he fought so far. Although he didn't let that bother him. It got him hard on the neck first. He remembered his mother saying that this could be a way to actually kill somebody, so he was thankful when he noticed he was still alive. He ran and grabbed a hold of the servant and pushed it against a tree. He ripped a spiky part from one of the branches off, and stabbed the servant in the heart. With its explosion, there was now only one left to deal with.
The last one was just watching the entire fight, seeing far far T.K. could make it. Now that it was just the two of them, it charged at T.K. Pushing him on the ground. Kicked him three times. T.K. noticed a knife carrier on its leg. He grabbed the knife, and sliced the left leg off. The servant hit T.K. hard in the face, and he fell back on the same tree he destroyed the last servant on. The servant shoved the shield into T.K.'s chest. T.K. got the knife again, and pushed himself out of the grip. Then ended the fight by cutting the servants head off. The final explosion happened, and T.K. was now left alone.
T.K. climbed up the hill quietly, and started heading back to the others. Hoping that the shadow was gone, and that Patomon was fine. It wasn't hard of a fight, but he noticed now that the last parts were a little difficult.
At the main campground, none of them even noticed T.K. was gone that entire time. All three of them had their digimon digivolve, hoping that it would be enough to defeat the shadow. The shadow was able to move by the digimon pretty easily. Having the goal just to take the humans out.
Matt noticed Mimi was on the ground scared, and he helped get her up. He noticed that Garurumon was attempting a attack at the shadow. The black body stared at the digimon, faceless of all expression.
"Howling Blaster!" Garurumon yelled and the shadow made the attack vanish by its hand. Then slowly strode to Garurumon, and gave a loud, deafening scream t Garurumon. It hurt everybody's ears in the area. Garurumon tried to resist the scream as they were still fighting each other. It gave another attempt of a attack to defeat the shadow.
Then the shadow countered the attack by throwing Garurumon down to the ground. It went back down to Gabumon, and didn't even have the strength to try digivolving once again. It hoped Kabuterimon and Togemon would do well as it wasn't even going to try fighting again.
Togemon came from behind, while Kabuterimon came through the front. So the shadow would be having to deal with two opponents at once. They didn't even do anything for a moment, but let the digimon approach it instead.
"Electro Shocker! Needle Spray!" Kabuterimon and Togemon yelled their attacks respectively. The shadow held its right hand at Kabuterimon, and left at Togemon. When the attacks reached the hands, they returned to the digimon that made them. Both fell down in defeat
After it was obvious that the victory was its own, the shadow faded away. The fight wasn't to kill them, that would be for later. It just wanted to show its power to them. Now times that by seven, the shadow was sure they would never win.
The group stood there, surprised over the easy defeat. T.K ran to them, but remained silent. With his victory, comes their defeat. Complete opposites of the situation. Patomon was on his shoulders now, silent as well.
Up on the mountain, I was ducking holding onto Gomamon tightly. I was scared. Scared that this was going to the end of the road for me, and I never got to even say good-bye to anyone. Even Matt would have been something. How would they do without me being there?
Gomamon was shaking an my chest could feel the trembles. I hoped it would digivolve, but no glow came. Or that at least somebody else from the group might show up. No luck on that either. It was official I was screwed. I looked up at Unimon, and kept my eyes open. Embracing my fate. When a loud noise came to my ears.
Tai was on Greymon's back, grinning at me as he was interested why I did this single journey. Just after, Sora was on Birdramon with a worried look on her face. She landed five feet away from Unimon. I felt glad now, that people did show up to help.
"Thank you." I muttered, and moved a few steps over to the left while Unimon was distracted. Tai was getting closer with Greymon to Unimon. Sora was going to wat until Tai made his move.
"Nova Blast!" Greymon yelled, and hit Unimon's left side pretty rough. Sora now took her chance to get at it. I was getting more relieved by the second because of them.
"Magical Fire!" Birdramon yelled, shooting out fire at Unimon and hit its helmet. The unicorn started wailing around wildly. As it was starting to slowly fall down off the mountain.
"Joe get away. Tell the others what is happening?" Sora requested, and I was about to listen. Until Unimon started going at her and Birdramon. I froze at that moment, not quite sure what my next course of action should be.
"Nova Blast!" Greymon gave a second go. Only barely hitting at Unimon's behind. Everything else just hit the mountain. Hope was still growing but fading away for me during this fight.
Unimon flew right at Birdramon and Sora They flew down right to the ground. They didn't move for several seconds, and Unimon was now flying at Tai. It was still below us, so I had to make a plan. Gomamon looked at me, wondering what was on my mind.
Before it even ask something like 'what art thou thinking' I jumped down. If it worked out well, I would get on Unimon's back. Fortunately, that was the one thing in all this that did work out well. I was on its back, trying really hard to grab a hold of the gear.
"Joe, why art thou doffing this? Please let me digivolve. It would work out well if thee would only let me." Gomamon said, and I was shaking my head. I had to keep Tai, Greymon Birdramon, Sora, and Gomamon all safe.
"This is for you all!" I was pulling harder at all the thoughts of our journey so far. With all the battles we had together and digivolutions. I had truly done the least. At least T.K. did a good job interacting with people and got to know them to make up for his lack of battle contributions. Me, I had nothing.
Unimon threw me off, and I hit the mountain. I really hurt for a moment, but I got over it when I saw something far more important. My device was glowing, Gomamon was now ready to digivolve. Number six on the list, I hope this was worth it.
"Gomamon digivolve to... IKKAKUMON!" Gomamon yelled, exposing its new self. A giant walrus with a black horn and white fur. As if the horn was important, it lowered the horn down. Looking like it was ready to attack.
"Harpoon Torpedo!" Ikkakumon yelled, hitting Unimon on the back. "I hath impressive accuracy." Ikkakumon told me, facing the Unimon again. About to give a second go and win the fight.
"Harpoon Torpedo!" Ikkakumon yelled a second time, getting Unimon spot on with the black gear. It exploded, and Unimon no longer tried to attack us. In fact, it flew away. The battle had been won, but this deepened the mystery of the black gears even more.
"I will get you." Tai got Sora up, and she got Birdramon up. All the digimon went back to their normal stages. We looked down the mountain. Everybody else in the group showed up. They walked to be at our sides, and Tai said something else.
"Nothing new looks down there. But I can draw a map of the area as a visual reference. Let's go back down after." He told us, and we all agreed silently. One detour now taken care of.
----
Chapter 10: Evil Shows His Face
We were watching Tai make the map of the island, and it was turning out to be less than impressive. That is really all I have to say about it. He drew for a few minutes, and much of it was illegible. I had to look down to make sense of it. T.K. was next to me, his hand on my shoulder. I looked at him, not really thinking about it.
"Tai, how do you expect any human being alive to look at this and actually understand it?" I asked, and it honestly was just all scribbles. Not even decent ones. Stuff that would make fifth grade drawings look like a masterpiece.
"Joe, give me a a break. I can understand it just fine. That's all that matters in the end man." Tai kept drawing, and Matt laughed when he saw it.
"Tai, I really have to agree with Joe on this one. It looks terrible. Please don't draw ever again. I can't even understand it, and drawing is not even my style." Matt laughed, putting his hands on his lap.
"I don't draw often. Give me a little bit of a break." Tai defended himself, and I noticed something only just now. Each of our digivices were a different color. Maybe that was supposed to show we were different in our own way. I don't know, doesn't make sense really. But I decided to comment on it.
"Guys, can I borrow your digivices for like a minute? I want to show you something I just noticed." I said, and all of them took out their digivices slowly. Like they were afraid I was going to do something bad to them. Then I showed them.
"Each digivice is a different color. Look at it for a second." They did, and saw I was correct. "Maybe this is supposed to track down when we are missing. Or at least a way we can. If we find one, we can remember the color, and make the connection. So let me name them all out for each person." I started naming them all off.
"Matt, yours is blue. Tai, you have orange. Mimi, you got green. Sora, you're the one with red. Izzy, remember you got purple. T.K., your's is opposite of mine, white. My is black." I said, and returned them back in the order I listed them off. Matt gave me a impressed look.
"I have to admit it Joe, you really did come in on the right subject at the right time. Everybody has their moment, and I have to express that." Matt said, and I smiled. Finally, it felt he was admitting I had a real purpose in this group. That was the best one of all. Tai nodded, and put the digivice in his pocket.
"Almost more helpful than my drawing of the map." We all laughed, and I couldn't help but laugh the hardest. Each day, each encounter, I was growing to like these people even more. Every one of them, even Matt. Then T.K. nudged at my shorts, and I looked down at him.
"Do you think we should head down now Joe?" He asked, and I looked down, and nodded.
"Yes we should. We spent long enough here. You know guys, you're all pretty fun to be around. Sorry if I was harsh to any of you in anyway. Let's take a good long rest tonight when we get down." On that case, we all agreed on. We started going down the mountain, unknowing we were now one step closer to at the time our greatest problem.
We were going down the mountain, and once we got a little bit lower than where I fought Unimon, I heard some loud roaring noises. Over these past several days, I grown to be very concerned when I heard that kind of stuff. I turned my back, and saw something coming in our direction.
"Guys, we should probably head down faster." Tai suggested, and we all agreed. But we didn't go down far until we saw another thing walking towards us. When they got closer, I got to see what they were. One was a green ogre, and the other was a mountain lion. T.K. pulled at my shorts, trying to get our attention.
"Do you think that they have something to do with the black gears?" T.K. asked, and we stood still, as we were getting cornered. Then Palmon spoke to us, giving us some information.
"These are Ogremon and Leomon. Maybe they are trying to have a brawl up here. They are worst enemies. Let's just go down, and not worry about it." Palmon said, and we went a little faster. Thinking that it was correct, which it wasn't.
"Leomon, you take the ones on that side. I will take the ones of this side." Ogremon told Leomon, and they took out their weapons, and charged closer at us. That was when I looked down at my device, and I wondered what everybody else was thinking. I couldn't wait. I looked at Gomamon, and we agreed that it should digivolve now silently.
"Gomamon digivolve to... IKKAKUMON!" Gomamon yelled, and went towards Leomon.
"Palmon digivolve to... TOGEMON!" Plamon yelled, and also went at Leomon.
"Tentomon digivolve to... KABUTERIMON!" Tentomon yelled, being the third one to go at Leomon.
"Agumon digivolve to... GREYMON!" Agumon yelled, being the first to go at Ogremon.
"Gabumon digivolve to... GARURUMON!" Gabumon yelled, going at Ogremon to.
"Biyomon digivolve to... BIRDRAMON!" Biyomon yelled, being the third to go at Ogremon. That made it all even. I looked at T.K. Wanting to give him s order.
"T.K., I don't want you fighting quite yet. Go with Patomon and we will meet you later. Just get as far away from this place as you can. I think we will find each other through our digivices." I told T.K., my hands on his shoulders. He nodded.
"I think you're right. I will meet you all soon. I will not go too fast, so you can catch me." He said, as he was heading away. I shook my head in disagreeance. I wanted him to run for it.
"No, go as fast as you can. Don't look back." I said, and he nodded reluctantly. He then started going down the mountain with Patomon. Then I turned back, and was ready to fight Leomon and Ogremon. All of our attacks were going at once.
"Harpoon Torpedo! Electro Shocker! Needle Spray!" Ikkaumon, Kabuterimon, and Togemon yelled at Leomon their attacks respectively. It blocked out a few of the needles and some of the shocker, but it looked as if some of the torpedo was making progress on destroying the sword it was holding.
"Nova Blast! Roaring Blaster! Magical Fire!" Greymon, Garurumon, and Birdramon each yelled their attacks at Ogremon respectively. I looked back, and saw T.K. all the way down the hill. Just as I wanted it. If we failed, at least he would be safe to tell something, hopefully Ignitemon on the road. I looked back, ad saw that the blast from Greymon slightly burned the club it had. The blaster looked as if it did decent damage. Then it looked as though the magical fire just scared it a little. bit.
For Ogremon, that amount of firepower, lower defenses and surprise was enough to defeat it. Ogremon fell down the cliff a little bit. Although it did look as if this falling was intentional. Fore Leomon, it swung its sword a little bit, getting at one of the wings of Kabuterimon. Hurting it a little bit. It stepped back a few steps, and was slow to go back at it.
"Harpoon Torpedo! Needle Spray!" Ikkakumon and Togemon yelled at Leomon again. This time, it looked like the torpedo broke the sword, and the needles got Leomon. It tried getting its arm up, but the fact still remained that it was hurt badly with all the needles.
Leomon went down the cliff, and that fight was over. Sora looked confused by that entire encounter in general.
"What was all that about?" Sora asked, and none of us answered for a moment. I had a idea, but I didn't say anything as I still wanted T.K. to get a little bit of distance on us. I was solid on that idea no matter what.
"I'm not quite sure what it would be. However, considering what has been going on these journeys, I wouldn't be surprised if that was the last we saw of them. Come on, let's meet up with T.K. I hope he got decent distance away from this." I said, and Izzy nodded.
"I agree with Joe on this one. Both on the theory of Leomon and Ogremon, along with us probably meeting up with T.K. by now." Izzy said, and with that, we started heading down the mountain. I felt that this fight in particular wasn't meant for more of anything, but as a warning instead. For once, I hoped I was wrong. Turns out, this was the one time I was fight. Amazing how that works out, isn't it? I always get reversed what I want.
T.K. had made his way down the entire mountain, and was taking a breathing break. That was when he felt everything grow colder around him. Like it was on purpose. Like something was seeking him personally. Both he and Patomon raised their awareness as something came towards them. Floating and entirely black. They were both scared.
"Mister T.K., I am now able to seek you alone. Your digimon may join. Let us just talk, you and I." T.K. looked even more scared when he heard the voice, and before he could even ask what it was, the floating thing came into perfect view. It was Devimon, despite him not even knowing that or what Devimon even was.
"What is it that you want?" T.K. asked, and a sweat was coming down his face. He felt he was overreacting a tad, but this felt far more sinister than anything he ever encountered. Devimon embraced his arms around T.K.'s chest, as if it was hugging him. Then wisphered something in his ear.
"My young little boy, do you feel as if you aren't wanted? Every feel that this people feel think they're superior to you in every way. They're wrong. I know that you personally have something far greater in store than any one of them. Who cares that they're all older than you, that won't matter in the long run. In fact, you being younger is the best way, so you can be here longer and for more percentage of you life. Are you interested?" So far, Devimon didn't sound too bad, and T.K. was at least interested on what it had to say. So he replied quietly.
"I want to at least hear more of this before I make any choices. So please, feel free to speak." T.K. said, and Devimon let go of his grip, getting in front of him. Despite not touching him anymore, he felt far colder. Like freezing now, and he put his arms around his body for some warmth.
"Good my young one. Reasonable answer, that would only come out of somebody with a reasonable mind and thoughts such as yourself. Let me delve deeper into this. For one, you may not know it, but you will become more powerful than any one of them. Not your digimon, you. Think about that for a tiny moment. I saw it in the future, you are connected with the fate of this digital world. More than anybody else in this group. Don't believe me, then just let events occur, and you will see I'm right. You're not some chosen one, but you do play a key element in all that will happen." Devimon said, grabbing T.K. with one arm. Patomon tired to speak, but something was forcing it to be silent. But it wanted desperately to tell T.K. that this all sounded like a trick that was been set up.
"I doubt this is true. Look at me, I can barely do anything without somebody looking after me. Even is I wanted to do something, something just keeps stopping it from doing so. Something makes it so I can't do anything to help at all. I'm useless. I've accepted it by now. Why can't anybody at least give me a second look, a chance, a examination to see I'm worth it though?" While T.K. didn't agree with Devimon, he did feel glad to say something to somebody. How he felt. Even though he had no clue what Devimon was going to be doing in the near future.
"I'm sorry you feel this way my young one. But if you join me, you will see the truth. Come one, just give it a try." Devimon put his hand out, and T.K. was about to shake it, when Patomon was nudging him. He decided to pull back at the last second. He made the right choice only because of his digimon.
"Sorry I don't even know who you are. I have to turn this offer down. But I was almost there. I will give you that much." T.K. replied, and put both his hands in his pocket. Showing how serious he was. With just one minor action. Devimon laughed hard, not over something he said, but over the fact that this one action already was setting up so many new things.
"So you feel that way little boy? I will see you later. Soon to be exact. Don't expect me to be nearly as kind as this in any of our future encounters." Devimon said, fading back away, and everything went back to normal temperature. That was when T.K. knew for sure that this thing had something to do with the place going cold.
He looked back, to see us all getting to him. He sighed in relief, and Matt hugged him in the brotherly way. There must have been a small part of him that was worried they wouldn't see each other again. Or at least in a while. I looked at him, and saw his face. I wanted to as him about it later, but not when we were in front of everybody else. This was more personal, and was able to pick that up right away. Tonight maybe I will talk to him a little.
We were walking along, trying to find a nice clear spot to stay the night at, when Tai started getting himself into the trees, and was trying to struggle his way out of them. Then through his struggle, I found something on the other side of the bushes.
"Look stop Tai, I think I see something over there. Maybe we should check it out." Everybody groaned until I walked closer, and opened the bushes up a little bit. Showing the pathway to what looked like a mansion. I was curious to find who, what, or why anybody would build a mansion in the middle of nowhere. Behind bushes that would require so much effort to go through. Maybe it was to keep intruders away. Matt came up to me, and got a closer view of the mansion for himself.
"You know what this means Joe? This means that we can be in a proper place to stay in for the night. I'm so glad that we have been able to find it. Maybe Tai's horrible drawing skills has now come to use." Matt said, and I was close to going with it. Until I let my normal thoughts cloud my judgement once again. I was thinking that we shouldn't barge into somebody's house without at least their permission.
"Guys, we shouldn't go into the house. Or at least we should knock on the door to see who or what maybe inside. It's only proper." I said, and Sora walked up to the door, as if even she just wanted to prove me wrong this time.
We all followed her until we reached the door and Sora started knocking upon it to show that nothing was inside. Knock knock, four times like that. Then looked at us after about a minute of no answers. Letting us decide if we should still go inside or not anymore.
"Maybe a little peak inside won't kill us." Mimi said, and I thought over it for a second. I decided that she was right inside, and that a tiny look inside wouldn't hurt. Maybe it wasn't a mansion, and just a place that was there. You never could tell, I guess.
'Let's give it a try." I said, and Sora opened the door. We walked on inside, and the door was closing in on itself. We stood there for a moment before any of us started checking it out.
T.K. right to the painting in the front hall, and stared at it amazed. I was curious to see what he was going staring crazy over, so I went up to it to check it out. It was a rather interesting looking one.
It was of a angel, with the bottom half being white. The top half was black, and the middle met with grey. Agumon walked up to us, inspecting it. He looked rather bothered, as if he had seen this painting before. In person or picture or dream I think will be answered soon.
"It's amazing isn't it? The bland of black and white for the grey middle for the angel. I feel as though this is heavy symbolism, but I'm not quite sure of what." T.K. gave his opinion of the picture, and looked over at Agumon. "Do you have any idea what this picture means? It looks like you do, with that look on your face."
"Yes T.K. I quite do. Let me explain from how I best remember what was being said to me when I was just a young one." Agumon responded, and the other members of the group walked up to the three of us. To listen to what Agumon was going to give us story wise.
"It was long ago, and I am not sure if this story is true or if it is recited anymore. But I will still tell you. There was one great angel. His name was MagnaAngemon Priest. Was a great wise giver and master that all respected to many reasons. Over the course of many years though, it started to go away from this personality and belief. Into something wrong. Its body literally split up into three different sections. For each mood or power. The black represents the bad side. The side that wants power and only cares about its personal advancement. The white represents the good side. The side that wants to always give and be good to everybody or everything. The side that will do what it needs for the others, even if it dies. The grey in the middle is the blending point. One that meets both. I don't know if this is true or not, but that is what I heard." Agumon told us, and I had to look at the picture to understand more. Maybe over time and thought, I would get it. Sounds like art of a myth though from what I understand.
We looked at it for a small while longer until we started examining all the other parts of the building. Nothing has come out to tell us to leave, so I was actually starting to think that maybe we were fine with coming into this mansion.
Inside the mansion, we looked around in some of the rooms that were in it. One was a library which looked as if it had many older books inside of it. Probably explaining the myths and stories of this digital world in some detail. Another room was the restrooms, no men or women though. One was a dining hall. Another room was a back area with some pools or some relaxing water pits we could warm ourselves up in. One last room that I noticed was a bedroom. With eight beds, one for each of us. Then there would have been one left remaining.
"Looks like we will be just fine for the night." Izzy said, and I had my mouth wide open. I was a little jealous over the owner of this mansion for having so much good stuff that made even me glad to be here now. One place that I decided to go to was the dining room to see what kind of food was there.
Everything that I would have pictured that would be one a American Thanksgiving dinner. I never participated in them, but I always wondered what they would be like. Out of being curious, I decided to sit at one of the chairs and eat a little bit of the food. To decide for myself if these traditions were any good. Although in reality, it was only August.
T.K. sat on the opposite side of the row from Matt. He was giving the food a attempt as well. I assumed that he must have been curious about it to. Matt looked at T.K., as if he was ready to ask him a question.
"How has school been like for you since our parents separated?" Matt asked, and T.K. stopped eating right there. Then he sighed, answering. I bet he didn't want to talk about his education in front of everybody else.
"As you know, before our parents left each other, I was doing terrible at my studies. I failed at all Math, spellings, reading, almost everything including PE. That was the end of when I was in third grade. In fourth grade, I was a little better. Still failing every class, but they were a tiny bit improved from there original position. Fifth grade, I had my friend named George help me learn Math. As you might have or not have remembered, he was two years older than me. With his help, I did better in that class at least. Although I was still not doing good on almost any of my other classes, and barely did better on my spelling tests. But for the fact that I improved on Math, I had made a improvement. In sixth grade, I was lacking studying for the first fourth of the year. Until I had a trusted guardian help make a plan with me on how I can do better on my classes. So I applied that to my studies, and got everything up in the six months before I left elementary school. Finishing off elementary school with a 3.625 GPA at the end of the sixth grade. Helped me get into writing, Science, Math, and reading. I also learned that year I was a child in special needs. I have some disabilities, and I won't let any of them get in my way. I will become a writer someday, get off of the special education needs before I finish school, get better than Mom. But in the end, I have to think Mom for getting me into the idea of writing. Everybody makes a influence on something or somebody else's life. If you don't understand this Matt, I will be surprised." T.K. said, the last part about what he will become sounding like a lecture. I was surprised he had the courage to step up about his problems with learning and having a disability like that. If I were him, I would have never revealed it. Maybe he was better than me in some cases. I looked at T.K., impressed. Everybody on the table remained silent for a good period afterwards. Then he got up, and headed out of the room. Matt sat there for a while longer, and decided to follow him.
I went up to the wall, to listen if they were saying anything. I heard Matt calling out to him.
"Sorry if I touched up on a sensitive subject in front of everybody else." Matt's voice yelled loud enough for T.K. to hear. I could hear steps on the stairs, so I assumed it was Matt getting up or T.K. getting down.
"There is a time and place to talk about everything. You obviously had not learned where and when you should talk about that stuff to me. I don't want to reveal to everybody that I was a piece of crap in school for five and a half years. Or the fact that I'm in special education. I'm going to that hot tub to relax for a while. If you want to come with me." T.K. said, and I heard some footsteps. Matt probably stood there from a moment of silence before I heard more steps. After a couple minutes, Tai and Izzy got up.
"We're going to that hot tub to." They both told us, and headed off. Mimi and Sora stood up after them.
"Let's check if there's a second hot tub. For the girls." Mimi suggested, and they left the room to. I was left alone, and I looked out the window. It was getting dark, and with the darkness, I felt more unsure. Like something was looking at us right now. I decided to shake it off, and go out to the hot tub with the guys. Leaving all the food at the table.
I walked outside a few minutes later with a towel around me. I saw that the other guys were in one together. I saw a barrier, and I assumed that this was for the girls separating us from their tub. I got closer to the tub, before I looked at everybody. Matt looked at me, like he was surprised that I wouldn't even go into the same hot tub as them.
"Really Joe. Just go in, it's not that bad." Matt told me, and I slowly got inside, everybody looking away from me when I was taking the towel off. I was worried that they would have noticed me doing that, and that was my problem with taking off the towel.
Tai looked at Izzy, as if he was going to ask a personal question. "Hey Izzy, do you or have you had a crush on a girl recently?"
"Well there's this girl at our school. I think she's rather good looking. She's a year older than me, and very quiet. Like she wouldn't really talk with people even if they go to her first. Makes her a little mysterious, which I find to be rather interesting. I don't know, that's just me. Her name is Heather." Izzy responded, and then he looked at Tai. "How about you?"
"I have like a strange combination of girls. Some at a higher grade, some lower. Some nerdy, some sport like. Just keeps changing every month or so. I guess I'm just one of those types of people that just keeps jumping around a lot and can never stick with one person. I don't know what to say beyond that." Tai replied, turning at Matt. "Do you care to tell of of yours?"
"I've been dating a lot since my parents divorced. It's been my best way to get over it honestly. When we date, I'm happy. When we break up, I would have them to think about and how I could have done better. The longest lasting one was five months. Now I'm just going to wait, and see if there is anybody out there for me. Or if there is anybody out there that deserves me to like them. At my age, I'm deciding to set down a little bit. Although there has been one girls who has been getting my attention lately. With how she seems to care about everybody and tries to understand them." Matt told us, and I didn't realize ever that his constant dating was a way to get over that big problem of life. Now I felt a little judgmental towards him. He looked at T.K. next. "If you don't want to, you don't have to. But what about you?"
"For me, it's been rather odd. It was a little more than a year ago. I have this friend named Davis, who goes to the same grade as me. He was having his twelfth birthday and I was invited to his house for the weekend. It was then I met his cousin Molly, who was only eight at the time. I thought she was rather cute and adorable, despite me already being twelve. Next year, when Davis was turning thirteen, I visited his house again for the weekend once more. I saw her again, and at that point thought she was attractive. Even though she was only nine, and I was at the point thirteen. But since that twelfth birthday party at Davis's, I been having a thing for younger women. Like one of the girls who lives next to me who is only ten now, I thought she was really attractive in her dress during her school play. All of the girls I've had a crush on for the last year have been ten or younger, some reaching as low as seven. I don't know why, but I think think that Molly girl started it." T.K. looked at us scared, worried that we would yell at him. "Joe, can you tell us about that girl you told me you went on a date earlier?" I could tell he wanted to change it to me as fast as possible.
"I liked her for a few years before the date, and asked her about it. Her name was Sarah, and she wants to try out writing like you do T.K. We learned about each others home roots as you might say more at that date. It was worth it. I wonder how she would feel about me being gone for so long." I told them, and I took a nice deep breath. Thinking that talk over girls was now over.
At the other hot tub, Sora and Mimi listened to what said strangely. Mimi looked at Sora to ask what her thoughts on that was.
"What did you think of what T.K. said in there? Rather strange he has his eyes set out for young ones." Mimi said, and Sora groaned.
"Why are guys so loud all the time? Does it have something to do with their genetics? If you don't mind, I don't want to talk to you about guys. How about we talk about what our favorite hobbies are?" Sora mumbled under her breath, then told Mimi her hobby. "I like playing soccer and hanging out with my friends. I don't really spend a lot of time at home. What do you want to say?" Mimi laughed a tiny bit, and then gave her answer.
"I like going through my stuff and seeing what I can do with them that day. Sometimes I even do dramatic games with my dolls and such. Even if the toys are girly and I'm a very girly person, I can act a lot like a boy when I want to. But I only want to when I'm in my room, because nobody can make fun me. But don't get me wrong, I would much rather be a girl." Mimi told Sora and they got out of the hot tub. We did so as well soon afterwards. Then got our clothes back on to head to bed. Well, we picked out some robes some the storage place as pajamas we could use until we return to Earth.
We were all in the bath robes that were from the hot tubs. T.K. ran to the farhest right bed and jumped right onto it ready to sleep. I went to the bed next to his, and laid down on it to. Matt was on the one next t me. Tai to the last one on the right. Izzy taking the top one of the left. Mimi on the bed next to him. Then Sora was the last one to settle down. Leaving the last bed on the left to be alone. All of our digimon went onto each of our beds, and I was already getting sleepy. I had just realized how tired I had truly been through all these adventures.
"Soon I feel we will be home. I'm actually starting to miss it now." I said, and everybody looked sad suddenly. "Sorry if I said anything wrong." I added in instantly.
"No Joe, it's okay. You were only stating your opinion. We are all starting to miss home, I believe." Matt replied, and I was glad he was able to forgive me. Then Tai turned off the light.
"The reason I think it took so long is because of my father. He hasn't been the best. Always wanting me to try out medical even though I don't want to. But I saw last night in my dreams that there would be a situation that I wouldn't mind doing it. Here I go again. If only there was some good advice." I kept going, and I was telling myself to shut up on the inside.
"I think we should just fall asleep now." Tai said, and went over to the bed. He was the first one out. It wasn't as easy for me, but I went to sleep to. That was the last sleep I would take before I would not see any of these people a little bit.
-In my dream, I was walking down the street in the middle of the night. Nobody else was outside to interrupt me from my night stroll. I felt this actually was a event from the past, even though I don't take night walks. Only later I would realize that this wasn't me. But I was seeing a event from another persons perspective. The man was walking to the store in the town, and when he headed inside, a old lady called to him.
"Jim have you got the application to take this store over with you?" The old lady asked, and the man handed it over to her.
"Yes I do. When do I start?" The man replied, sitting down in the chair. The old lady signed the paper. Handing it back to him with a smile on her face. The man who was walking earlier I realized now was my brother looked pretty happy to.
"Thanks Jim. Starting tomorrow all rights to this store are yours. You can do anything with this property that you want. Even change the entire structure if you want. I had no clue that when you were still a big boy five years ago buying chocolate bars asking how long I can still run here you were on the inside thinking about taking this place over. Thanks once again. I feel glad that somebody like you can use this property for good and not have this place be destroyed. I will leave now. To my home where I will spend the rest of my days at. I don't think I will live for more than another week anyways so it's alright. One last request Jim, in my funeral which I will think will be in the next two to three months at latest, can you attend for my sake?" The old lady hugged Jim hard in happiness, and left the store walking with a cane.
Jim looked through the store and saw that much of it was ruined. It was obvious that nobody went to it recently and she was starting to not care anymore. Jim opened one of the freezers, and pulled all the content out of it. Throwing it away. Then grabbed the paint at some shelves, and walked outside. He was painting a new logo on the store, showing that it was something new now. He kept painting it for half the night, and when morning rolled over, there was a new logo.
The Kido Store. That was the new logo, and it was meant for himself.
Then he added a notice which took another hour.
Opens September 1st. That was one month from the day. So one month to change how the store looked into something new.
Jim walked outside once again, and smiled. He rubbed his chin. "Will be a good job to have until I finish college. I wonder how Beth will react. She should be pleased. If only my former friends from my journeys in that one world saw this. I bet at least one would be proud." Jim said, and walked back home. He was going to do more on the store in the morning.
When he walked back inside, he checked the messages to see what they said. He clicked on one, and heard Beth's voice. Then he put the phone up to his ear. He looked happy at first, but the more he listened, the more he looked like he was in horror. Then at the end, he dropped the phone and ran to his room. Then started crying on hid bed. "Why are you doing this to me?" Jim cried and that was all I was able to hear through the tears. That was when the dream ended.-
I woke up and heard that Tai was screaming. I got my upper body up to see what he was making such a big deal over. I saw him pointing up at something. That was when I saw what it was, and felt he was reacting properly.
What I saw looked like a normal human man, but it wasn't. He looked sinister, like he was waiting so long for this meeting to happen. I was going to run to him before he pushed me back on the bed and I couldn't get back up despite how much I tried to resist. Everybody woke up, and saw what it was. T.K. gasped, and started to say something.
"Hello everybody. Let me present myself to you all. My name is Devimon. I hope you enjoy this show I will present to you all. I will separate you all from each other onto different island segments. You will have to past tests each and several other things to come back to each other and be united once more. My two helpers in this are Leomon and Ogremon. I invented the black gears that you've been trying to destroy from several digimon you've been facing since you came here." Devimon introduced himself to us and snapped his finger. Making us all float up with our beds, and flew us all away in different directions. The island broke up in seven different pieces, and our separations grew with each second. I couldn't see any of them anymore. I fell back on my bed in defeat. This was really happening.
Tai was holding his device, as he still in front of Devimon. He stood next to Agumon, both ready to face him with his servants.
"Agumon, are you ready to digivolve?" Tai asked, as Leomon and Ogremon came closer to him. Devimon laughed like he thought Tai was a great comedian.
"Oh please continue. I love to see you struggle. As long as I can stop it, you can't digivolve. I have won this time. Good bye Tai and Agumon. You must pass your test that I told you about before I will even let you fight me." Devimon said as he air pushed Tai off the mansion. He fell into the water with Agumon holding him as protection. Leomon and Ogremon stood next to him.
"Find them. Destroy all of them. Even if they break the gears, I will take you over again. So even try to escape me. Now go both of you." Devimon said forcing Leomon and Ogremon away. He stood there a while longer before he went back to his castle. The mansion fading away as it was a trick.
----
After working on chapter 10, before working on chapter 11. In the year 2018.
Joe and T.K. were in the living room, looking at the progress written at that point. "We spent all night writing this. Wow, surprised it took that long to write all this." T.K. looked at him, as he was pouring himself a drink.
"Did you think it was going to take longer or short to reach that point in the story? I would have thought it would have taken longer. Still, we're a little more than half way through through writing the events of the first story arc." T.K. responded, and held the the drink up in a way that was him asking if Joe wanted a cup. Joe shook his head. Joe was thinking of something.
"I said this was all a team effort. So I thought, what if we saw some of the people? to get what they think on it. Get this insight for a little bit?" Joe asked, and T.K. took a drink from the cup he made. Then he took a set at a couch.
"Maybe we should. Who do you think we should visit first?" T.K. asked, and Joe thought about it for a moment. Then he found it obvious.
"I think we should try Matt's first. I think he would be at his job as normal." Joe said, and T.K. put his head back. Not wanting to show he didn't understand why Joe picked Matt.
"Alright. How about we finish up these next few chapters. You know, until we as a group faced Devimon and defeated. That way, we would have one story part done with. Then we can go there and get his insight on the next one. What do you think of that?" T.K. suggested, and Joe nodded.
"I think that idea is okay. Let's get started on these next chapters now. You know, most of these next chapters neither of us were on. So I think we can make a exception here and have somebody narrate for them." Joe said, and took out the notebook again. Ready to write the last parts of the story arc onto it and start on the next on when they met Matt later. Then they started writing again.
Chapter 11: Subzero Ice Punch
Chapter Told By Tai
So there I was swimming away from the place I saw Devimon. Agumon was on my back, and the water was unberably cold. Maybe everything would be fine and I can end up on a nice beach like place. Considering our luck however, that is very unlikely.
"How far are we to reaching land?" Agumon asked as I continued swimming. I was surprised that I could last this long without break. Maybe I should quit soccer and try the swimming team instead. But the setback is that I obviously had no clue if we were anywhere close to land.
"I have no clue. I never really been around this place too long. Plus, the island just broke on us. That should destroy anything we can rely on with our knowledge of this island. So please stop asking me that. I know it was just once but still." I answered, and kept going harder. Well, this did give me good time to think to myself.
How about we go over what I think about the other members of the group for a change. Just for fun. Starting with Sora. As you might have guessed from our interactions so far, we are really good friends. Since third grade to be exact. Although she has gotten into a recent argument with her mother that has lasted for a while. It was over a flower shop and ownership. Sora's mother thinks that she should run the shop that she currently does when she is retired for at least a short period of time. Even if it's just a year or two. Sora doesn't want to and always jumps to how her mom reacted to a injury she faced. Which has nothing to do with the shop. Her mother says she is really ill and probably won't last much longer. You want to know what I think? I'm actually on the moms side on this one. The reason is becuase the mom said even if its just a year or two. Say her mom stops when Sora gets out of high school for a moment here, and Sora goes to college right away. If she does, then she would have that as a part time first job to not only help her get on her feet alone, but it would help her pay for her college fees. When you think about ot that way, it's actually a very reasonable request. Because when she is done with college, she can drop the job, let somebody else have it, and then she can do what she wants. So if not for any other perspective, please look at it that way. So yes, I think her mother wins this one.
Next person is Matt. At first I wasn't too fond of him. I mean I didn't hate him or anything like that, but he never impressed me. Over time, I grown used to him a little bit. I find him to be okay in the sense that it feels like he knows what he's doing at least now. I will give him credit for the fact that it really does seem like he cares about T.K. and what happens to him. Matt deserves that much at least.
Next person I can talk about is Izzy. I actually don't mind him. He's a rather interesting guy. He and I get along well enough and the two of us are actually sort of friends. I will tell you how that unexpected turn of events happened. So last year I was doing my high school entrance exam, and I didn't know how to do some of the subjects of the test. So he decided to come over to my house a few times and he would go through some of the tricks with me. Because of this, I was actually able to do well on the test and I passed it. Being able to head to the high school I wanted to. So there is how he helped me. Since then, we've been friends in the helper sort of way. I guess that's all there really is to say about Izzy.
I will now discuss Mimi. I think she's sort of whiny but alright for some reasons that I have personally. When she shows that she cares, I do believe it. Like when she would talk to Joe, and she would show actual signs of caring. However, I do see that there are times when it seems that she doesn't really care what happens to others. Like when she was whining on the beach the first day we were in this place. So she isn't without her faults. But she's okay enough. I can see why she has a decent size of friends at the school. I really do. Oh I can't forget when she fought Monzaemon with her partner. That rocked.
I will talk about T.K. now. I don't really mind him. I mean, he's not like amazing or anything. But he's okay. He's also rather short for his age. I know this must have been brought up before, but dear lord how can you be so short. When you really sit down and have a actual conversation with him, it could go many different directions. He really does make you think about almost everything you say. Like how he could counter every argument and almost always come out at top. I know that he must have some experience doing talks or something like that. He's also kind of quiet. Which is like a blessing after all the noise that you would have to deal with in the digital world.
I saved Joe for last on purpose. Because he was the last one to show up. I like how he really tries to get into all possible situations. Show that he really does care about what would happen to everybody else on this group. That I really do respect, even if some of my actions up to this point don't show it. It's just sometimes I do think that he might be trying a little to hard. That is all. He sounds like a interesting guy, if he would open himself up more.
So there you have it, a little talk about my opinions of all the people in the group. I could have thought in silence for a little bit longer until Agumon kind of took me out of my thought bubble. I was kind of glad that it did though. Because we were heading right into a rock. We would have if Agumon didn't get me to get me out of my deep thoughts.
"Tai stop zoning out and look at what is about to happen to us." Agumon said, and I was about to scream when I saw that the rock was only a few feet away. I tried swimming away, but I still kept getting closer to the rock and when I slammed right into it, I flew a little in the air and landed hard on the snow covering that ground of the rock.
On a different section of the destroyed island parts Devimon made, Matt was walking around. Gabumon was right behind him silent. It didn't want to bother Matt because it seemed that Matt wasn't even giving attention to its existence.
"Gabumon, I'm freezing. Why did I have to get the coldest part of the island? I hate the cold." Matt said, and then remembered his brother. "T.K., we need to find him right now." Matt started walking a little bit faster when he thought of T.K. Gabumon also stepped up its pace a little bit also.
"Matt, listen to me here. It won't help you to push yourself like this. I know that T.K. is important to you, but this will hurt you if you try to do this over attempting to make yourself nice and warm. That should be your first thought process. T.K. will have to wait a little bit longer before he gets a nice reunion from you." Gabumon said, and Matt was about ready to pumble onto the ground from being so cold.
"I can at least make it to a tree. That might keep me a little bit more for a tiny while." Matt said to himself more than it was even directed towards Gabumon. He pushed himself a tiny bit harder until he reached the closest tree to him. Once there, he flopped down and closed his eyes.
Gabumon had caught up with Matt and saw that he was taking a break. He wad starting to get covered up in snow. Matt didn't even realize that he was getting even colder and was almost drowning himself in snow. What Gabumon didn't know was that they happened to catch one of the worst blizzards of this area in many years.
Gabumon left Matt for a little bit to see if there was any cave that would keep them warm for a little. After a bit of searching, they found the entrance of one. Gabumon went back to Matt, who was now almost completely covered in snow and dragged him all the way to the cave. Despite being far heavier than it.
"I will start a fire for Matt." Gabumon said, breathing a tiny bit of fire on some wood and begun a fire to warm Matt up a little bit. After seeing that this wasn't doing the full job, Gabumon gave up their jacket. Putting the fir on Matt, they left the cave so Matt wouldn't have to see his partner bare.
Matt opened his eyes a little bit and saw that Gabumon's fir was on him. He was curious why, but didn't do anything about it. Then he muttered something that he didn't know he was muttering. "Sora, where are you?" Matt asked under his breath. Closing his eyes once again, he was asleep for a large portion of the night.
When all this with Matt and Gabumon was happening, I was walking around the large rock I was forced on. I saw some phone poles, and that part interested me because they were on a place on snow. All the booths were frozen, and I was curious to check it out. Until I saw that I clothes were almost frozen.
"Hey Agumon, can you warm up my clothes for me?" I asked, and Agumon nodded. Breathing some fire on the clothes, warming them up. When a few second pasted, I thought that they were good enough heated. "Thanks Agumon."
"No problem Tai. Weren't you going to check out the phone booths?" Agumon responded, and I was going back on my way to check them out.
"No touching my phone booths." A digimon said, and I looked up to see what it was. It was a snowman digimon. This didn't surprise me at all. I mean, we've been in snow for like ten minutes now. This place makes no logical sense. So I wasn't surprised when I saw a real living snowman that was able to talk to us.
"That digimon is called Frigimon." Agumon told me, and I had no clue how it knew this fact. Or how it was going to help us at all. But I didn't argue with it at all. Since I sort of now know better than to argue anything digimon related. It just turns out awful a lot of the time.
"Subzero Ice Punch!" Frigimon yelled its attack at us, and I had to role away to my side when I saw the giant ice spear flying right at me. I got up, and the ice spear was close to hitting one of the phone booths. Which was about to break it. Agumon ran right at me to get away from this Frigimon's attack.
"Dear god this is insane." I said as the Frigimon was throwing another ice spear at me. I will tell you that the phone booth that was hit was just shattering. You may guess that I didn't quite exactly want to shatter. The Frigimon was running right at us at surprising fast rate. It made me try to run a little bit harder then. But like I said, I didn't want to become that digimon's icicle pop lick snack.
"Tai what are we going to do?" Agumon asked as we were about to hit the edge wall of this rock. Which was completely ice. I turned around to see where the Frigimon was exactly. It was only like a few inches in front of us. Right when the Frigimon was in our face almost, I ducked with under Agumon to get under its legs.
"Agumon, I have a idea." I said, and Agumon looked up at me to hear what my amazing but terrible at the same time idea was.
"Can you say it soon because like you I don't want to become a popsicle." Agumon said, and I explained the idea to it.
"I need you to breath fire on its back when it gets close to us." I said, and Agumon gave me a confused look. Probably wondering why I wanted it to do that. "Because I see a giant black gear on its back. That must be the reason that it is acting this way. I am certain of it. I ca assume this because every time that we get attacked, it is because of a black gear. It is obviously related." I explained, and Agumon was able to understand it then.
"On my count. Three, two, one, fire." I said, and then I threw up the Agumon into the air. Then it breathed the fire onto the black gear. The gear started to melt and when it broke apart the fight was then won. Frigimon dropped the ice spear that it had in its hands and looked at us confused for a moment. Wondering who or what we were.
"Who are you?" Frigimon asked, and I answered telling the truth.
"My name is Tai, and this digimon here is Agumon." I told it, and told them of our adventures up to that point from start to finish. It was now pitch black outside. So it was past midnight, easy. The Frigimon nodded at all the parts of the story that they found interesting.
"Frigimon, I have a question to ask you. Do you think that you have met any of these people or digimon that I talked about earlier? Like within the last few hours alone." I asked, and Frigimon looked excited. Like it had a valid purpose in something that was just beyond itself.
"I met one of them. I think he said his name was Matt. I can lead you over to the place I was aware of him going. He might have left that place, but I think that it would be worth a try for you personally." Frigimon answered, and held its hands out. "Don't worry, I won't freeze you. I just have a very different way of travelling to places that I need to go to. It will get you there by the early morning. I hope that this will be good enough for you." Frigimon said, and we got on its arms. Agumon went on one, and I went on the opposite. I can't recall which ones we took though.
Frigimon stomped its foot on the water, creating a path of pure ice on the water. "I will have to stomp on the ground every once in a while because it only goes a few feet ahead of us. Sorry if this keeps you up. The part of the island that this Matt is one is a quite a few miles away." With that warning, it started its walk all the way to us reaching Matt. I was going to thank it when he reached the other side. I was going to wait until then though.
With those events going on, I was still on Frigimon's hand. I was looking at the dark water and black sky. Don't expect me to go super deep into describing how amazing that moon I saw was Because I've read so many dang books that do just that. Get you super into the setting, but never get you anything with the whole flipping plot.
"Frigimon, do you really remember how exactly you felt while the black gear was in your back?" I asked, because I thought that if I learned of this, then I can get to know about what to do to counter these feelings and perhaps prevent some black gears from going in before they would ever strike.
"Well, my body would feel itchy quite often. When that didn't happen, it would feel hard. I can't really say hard with what though, just hard. my eyes would freak out quite often. Even more than they normally do, and they do sort of often. In the sun, but never in the night. I didn't remember caring about the phone booths, but I became obsessed with the idea of destroying those when I got the gear in me. Does that help just a little bit for you?" Frigimon replied, and I was thinking about it. It might have helped a little bit, but I'm not quite sure how much though.
"Thanks for telling me that." I said out of still being polite. Maybe it come in handy looking back at it in the future. So I shouldn't quite give up. Agumon was completely thinking about something else, but I didn't know what. I could just tell by the looks on their face.
Time was passing by at a decently fast rate, and our progress to reaching the other part of the island was growing more well. So I guess there wasn't too much to complain about. However, I could wish that it wasn't just so dang cold.
"What is the best food that you ever had?" Agumon asked randomly, and none of us really quite got it. I laughed at it, which made me not worry about Devimon or anything else for a little while longer.
"I don't know what I best food I ever had was. Although my favorite fast food would be... I don't quite know actually. I can't answer that." I said, and looked down at the icy path. Really trying to decide what it could have been. Wow, I haven't really thought this much over past eating experiences before.
Frigimon continued going down the ice path that they were making. Stommping every seven or eight steps to make more ice. I think we were about half way to the other part of that island that Matt was on. I hoped that this guy wasn't in trouble. I didn't want to save his dang butt. That would be no fun at all. Whatever, not like everything goes my way. For all I know, Matt could be half dead when I reach him. If I ever reach him at all.
"Tai relax, I can see your stress just from your facial expressions." Agumon said, and I knew that it was right. So I forced myself to give myself a nice face. Frigimon remained silent for a bit of this walk. I was so tired from this that I just closed my eyes to at least take a breath nap before the sun would get up again and force me awake.
A few hours I would guess later I woke up. By the sun like I guessed. I was really glad though when I saw the progress that the Frigimon had made. It looked like we were getting close to the part of the island that Matt was on. I would say within another fifteen minutes we would be set. Agumon opened their eyes to, and I hadn't known that they were asleep to. Frigimon started walking at a tad bit of a faster pace. Like they were excited to get this walk over with finally. I deep down agreed.
"Hey Frigimon, thanks for doing this. I feel my back is a tad sore. I think it's more of the position than the fact I was on your hand. Don't worry about it okay." I said, and Frigimon nodded.
"I kind of had nothing else to do, so I don't see why I shouldn't." Frigimon said, and we continued waiting. I was silent for the last tad of it, and Agumon was to.
At the end, Frigimon made one final kick, and lowered us down to the ground. I turned around to look at the Frigimon in the face, and say good bye to it at least.
"I don't know if we will ever see each other again, so I guess that this is good bye." I said, and then Frigimon patted my right shoulder with their cold arms.
"I won't forget you." Frigimon said, and then started walking off. Agumon cleared their throat, and I knew that it was indicating that we should go out and try to find Matt. Which I agreed with silently.
So I started walking around the frozen part of the island that Matt just had to be on. I was already getting cold, and I wondered how Matt would have been able to handle it. Heck, I didn't even know if Matt had handled it because I haven't seen him yet. Now I'm just speaking the obvious am I?
Agumon looked like it wanted to burn some of the snow so the walking can be a little easier. "Wow this placing for us to search is really bad for me. I guess that I shouldn't complain too much about it. I mean, we have to find Matt and all, so I can respect what we have to do. I just don't like it." Agumon complained, and I didn't stop it. I sort of agreed a little on what they were saying. I was thinking that a break would be okay, but then I remembered that we barely have done any walking. So we shouldn't be already taking a break yet.
With us trying to reach Matt, he was just waking up for the morning also. Realizing the really bad cold and also saw that Gabumon was gone. He forced himself to stand up. It wasn't so bad for a little bit, then he started sneezing really bad. He knew that this was a sickness that he had caught. But he wanted to find Gabumon, then he would worry about finding T.K. No matter what Gabumon would say about it on approval or disapproval. Before he continued, he quickly looked down to see the Gabumon fur coat, and forgot all about that the night prior.
He was then thinking to himself trying to recall it all. While he was searching for Gabumon at the same time. This was bothering him. Why was he away from everybody else in the group right now?
Then he thought of the night prior when the group was at the castle. Everybody had fallen for it, so he can't really blame anybody. But they were having a good time, and then when they were going to rest was when the memory started being hard on him.
Wait, he was starting to remember. There was something called Devimon that came in and threw all their beds in different directions. Matt had not seen anything like it before, even in something like the digital world. However, it didn't really scare him at the time. However, thinking about it, he was starting to get really scared just reflecting upon it.
After having these thoughts run through his mind, he found Gabumon's foot steps. He started running through the path that they left on the ground. He was beyond curious as to why it left Matt alone in the cave, and why it had given up its fur coat just for him. It seemed really nice but strange of a thing to do.
When Matt had been going slow for a long enough time then, he decided to go a little bit faster so he could get to Gabumon quicker. "I am coming to get you." He said, and he was progressively getting closer to reaching it.
Then there was Gabumon, on the ground not really being able to make any sort of movement. Matt went up to it, and put the fur coat over it. "It's okay. You didn't have to do this." Matt told Gabumon, and then he picked it up. "Let's get T.K. now. I do feel much better." He continued, and started walking from that place to continue the look for his brother.
When Matt was looking for Gabumon, I was close to finding them. I was really not going in any sort of aim or direction. I was just wanting to find them. I turned left after a while, and saw Matt's footprints. I knew then that Agumon and I were close to finding them.
So I sped up my pace by a fair amount, so I can be sure to reach them at some point. Agumon was right next to me, knowing why I was running this fast. "Do you think he will be okay?" Agumon asked, and I nodded.
"I just want to be sure. I mean, he's one of our camp mates." I replied, and soon after saying that, we saw Matt next to Gabumon. Matt and Gabumon both looked in bad condition, and I wondered why that would be. If something happened the say prior that I should know about. "Hey, what is going on?" I asked, and Matt got up.
"Oh I need to find T.K. now, good bye Tai but I need to head out now." Matt said, and that actually made me kind of made. How he barely gave me a hello before deciding that he should just ditch me.
"Hey, just because you don't want to talk to me doesn't mean you shouldn't. You can just give me a simple hello and I will be okay with that." I told him, and walked behind him and grabbed his shoulder. He looked back at me, looking a tad annoyed.
"Are we really going to be doing this right now? Didn't you listen to what I said about finding T.K.?" Matt asked annoyed as well, and I nodded. Our digimon just looking at us confused as to why we were doing this now.
"Just let Matt go Tai, we can just go and look for somebody else. Or we can look for T.K. together. How do you feel about that idea?" Gabumon said, and I shook my head. I didn't want to do either. I didn't want to look for T.K. with Matt. I wouldn't mind if he left, if he would just strike a small a small conversation with me.
"If you don't to look for T.K. with me, then let me go." Matt suggested, and I held my arms out. Giving in. I actually kid of meant it, and he punched me in the face. "That's what you get." Matt told me, and I held my face a little bit. I got him in the chest in response to make up for it.
"That's what you get." I told him back, and Matt pushed me to the ground. He kept hitting me over and over again in the chest. To the point where it was honestly hard just to breath. I was coughing, and he wouldn't stop until I was honestly bleeding. Only then did he get up, and let me rest on the ground for a little bit.
"Please don't push my buttons again. That's what I will do. Beat you up like that. Because that's what you deserve."
Then I got up, not even trying to fight back. I knew I wouldn't be able to stand a chance the way he nearly took me out like that. "Okay you win. Go ahead and look for T.K. alone." I said, and Matt looked glad I was giving him permission to do something he would have done anyways. He walked on for a little bit, and then fell down. I ran up to him, just to make sure he was alright. I looked down to the area he was at, and saw him about to fall down a giant cliff. I held my hands up, just so he would get up. He grabbed my hands, and then he got up. Gabumon was okay, just looking at us.
Once Matt got up and was next to us, he sighed in relief the way you do when you are saved from possible death. "Okay, I guess I should thank you for this." He said, and then was about to walk away when something odd was running right in our direction.
Meanwhile with this happening, Matt and I were on out part of the island and as far as we knew going in different goals and directions. Agumon was next to me of course, and Gabumon was next to Matt. That was until of course, we heard a loud digimon roaring at us both.
"What are you two doing on my scared place?" We both heard, and turned around. Seeing something that would make the abominabil snowman look like a nice teddy bear in comparison. Gabumon told us both what the digimon was for us.
"That is called Mojyamon. It considers every plane of land that it lives on to be its scared home. It also has a pretty powerful attack if you are not paying close attention to what it will do to you." Gabumon told us those words almost exactly, and the Mojyamon started coming at us with a giant bone. I am not making that weapon up.
"Bone Boomerang!" Mojyamon yelled, and threw its bone at us. Matt pushed me down, so I wouldn't be hit by it. He got a little pelted in the back, and I could tell that it hurt him a lot. Couldn't blame him. Looked like it did. I even heard a tiny wince in pain. Then Frigimon was walking towards us with a basket of fruits and stuff. I was beyond curious as to why it had that if you were wondering. But I didn't really care about that at the moment. Seeing as a giant stick was pretty much being tossed at us.
"Mojyamon, why don't you leave those two alone." Frigimon said, and then the bone dropped on the ground really loud and obviously hard. Cracking something on the ground and all of us saw a bunch of black gears under us.
"Wow, I wonder how long it took Devimon to get all this stuff ready." Matt said and I wondered the same thing in my head. But I knew what we had to do to take care of this, and that was to destroy as many of them as possible.
"Agumon, Gabumon, do you think you should digivolve now to destroy some of these rings?" I asked, and Matt nodded to my idea. Our digivices glowing, and our digimon digivolved.
"Agumon digivolve to... GREYMON!" Agumon yelled, now waiting for Gabumon.
"Gabumon digivolve to... GARURUMON!" Gabumon yelled, and then they both shot some attacks.
"Nova Blast!" Greymon yelled, and destroyed some black gears.
"Roaring Blaster!" Garurumon yelled, destroying some more black gears. Then our island parts started shaking. Frigimon had a idea on what it was about.
"I think the icy part of the island and this part is uniting. Since you two passed a test that Devimon gave you. Now we need the other five to do so. But we are two steps closer." Frigimon said, and I looked at Matt. I was glad that our uniting with the others might not take so long or be so hard after all.
Matt was thinking to himself. About Sora and what she might be feeling for some reason. Then about his brother T.K. and how he might be holding up. Then he looked at me, and nodded. "Two down, five to go." He told me as we stared away at the great mountain Devimon was at. We would rest until the others got back and then we would try to confront it.
----
Chapter 12: A Clue to the Digi-Past
Chapter Told By Mimi
It had been able a day or so since Devimon forced us all to go in different directions from each other. Palmon and I were flying right towards a island piece, and we were screaming at the same time. "Palmon, if we don't make it, sorry for forcing you to deal with this!" I screamed at Palmon, and we slammed hard on the island piece.
It hurt, hard. I got up a few minutes later after I was over the pain and impact. Palmon got up a bit after me, and I could tell by the looks on their face that they agreed with how I felt.
"Let's hope we never had to deal with this again." I said, and Palmon nodded. With that, we decided to go around a bit.
The island itself wasn't too impressive, which I didn't mind honestly. It was a nice break from the constant bomb of doing stuff all over the place. Although Palmon seemed to like it. Like it was living in this place a long time ago. I then thought of something. What if this was the place Palmon grew up at until we met. I decided to ask it.
"Palmon, I can't help but wonder from how you are reacting, but is this where you grew up at before we met each other?" I asked, and Palmon checked m out. It was obvious that it forgot I was even there at all.
"Yes Mimi. I remember these nice trees and bananas. Being back here makes me so happy." Palmon jumped around happily, and then looked at me. As if it was making me sad or offended. "Sorry if I'm making you miss your home right now. I will stop if it makes you feel any better." I shook my head.
"You can be happy I shouldn't stop you." I told Palmon, and they looked happy beyond all belief when I said that.
"Thanks Mimi. How do you feel about being away from home for so long?" Palmon asked, and I gave what I thought was a mature response.
"I signed up to be at summer camp for a few months. I knew I was willing myself to be away from home for a while. So I can't be too mad for it." I replied, and then we started walking a little while. Palmon was trying to lead me somewhere. I had no clue where, I just knew it was trying to get me to a place.
"These are the types of food I loved." Palmon said, and handed me a pink banana that looked like it could have been averagely tastey. Which is a massive improvement from where I was in having no food for a really long time.
"Sure let me try one." I said, and Palmon handed me one from the tree. I opened it, and I saw that there was more peel. I opened it further, and further until I got to the core. Where no food was shown. I looked at Palmon, as if it was was trying to pull a joke on me or something like that.
"Did you do that on purpose?" I asked Palmon, and they started laughing. Not at me, at them self.
"Sorry. Forgot about all that. I guess we should go around and try some food that you can actually can have." Palmon replied, and we started walking once again.
I remember us nearly reaching the end of this island section, and I saw the clear blue waters down below. "If only we could be doing this every day." I muttered under my breath.
So then soon after I said that, I felt a rumble on the ground down below. I had no idea what it was until I saw part of the island and another one moving towards each other.
I fell on my bottom, and stared at Palmon for a little bit. They looked at me back, looking probably just as surprised.
"Let's get away from here." Palmon suggested, and we got up. The two of us tried running away from the edge when the two island parts hitting each other. It was too late.
After a moment, it was safe for us to get up. "I guess we can at least check out what is on the other island part." I said, as we decided to head there.
Izzy was wandering around with Tentomon, with no goal of place in mind. He hadn't seen anybody else in the group for a while. "Tentomon, how are you feeling at the moment?"
"Not too bad Izzy, is there a problem that I must be aware of?" Tentomon responded, and Izzy started to put his hand in his pocket. As if trying to find something in it.
"You know that claw in a jar that Joe found in the factory?" Izzy asked, and Tentomon gave a confused nod. That was when he found the thing he was looking for.
"I actually have that jar with me right now. I took it from his bag. I really want to see if I can use or do something out of it." Izzy continued talking, and showed Tentomon the jar.
"Do you think you could do something out of it?" Tentomon asked curious. This conversation was being made while walking still.
The two of them saw some place that looked like old ruins. "Maybe we should check that place out." Izzy said, and Izzy did have a idea on what he wanted to do with the claw. He just needed more items, evidence this is real, and some privacy.
Meanwhile, Palmon and I were still heading down the new island part. Because I was certain somebody or something worth checking out is there.
"Mimi, are you certain there really is something here?" Palmon asked, and I nodded for what felt like was the tenth time.
"If you say so." Palmon said, and we became silent once again. But even I was starting to question if this was true or not.
I was thinking about my house, and how my parents must be doing now. My father was most likely at work, and my mother was probably working on making their dinner for that night. Here I was with my one recent chance of eating being a total joke. They were living paradise compared to me.
Palmon was right at my feet, and I knew for certain this time they were examining me. "I'm not god with emotions, but I can tell that something is bothering you. What is it this time?"
I gave in and answered their question. "I am just thinking about my family back home. You know, just thinking about what they are most likely doing. Perhaps not even sure I am gone from camp."
Palmon didn't reply for quite a while after that. When it did, it had almost nothing to do with what I said, but once again a personal observation.
"Hey look over there. Maybe we can find another member of the group." Palmon said to get my attention, and i looked to see what it was.
From what I was able to see, it looked like a bunch of ruins. Sort of like a old temple you may say. I was starting to bet to myself that Palmon was right on this one.
"I don't like it exactly, but I think that you are right. So let's get inside even if it's just for a minute or two." I told it, and we headed on inside.
Inside the ruin looking place, I saw a bunch of odd symbols along each of the walls. "Same as the ones I saw in the factory." I heard a voice mutter, as if studying them very closely.
I looked around to see who said that, and that was when I saw Izzy. He was standing next to Tentomon, observing the walls.
Next to him was one of Devimon's black gear. Which I was pretty sure he was perfectly aware of though. So for that reason, I didn't make a big deal out of trying to point it out.
I also saw Izzy holding something that looked like that claw Joe found at the factory. Upon getting closer to him, I realized that it was the claw that Joe found in the factory.
When I walked up to him, I tried getting his attention. Even if it was in the smallest way possible. "Hello, what are you doing exactly?" I asked, and he looked at me.
"Just checking these walls out, as you might have been able to tell. Trying to make sense of it." Izzy said, and I walked directly next to him. I held device thing.
"Is there anything I can do to help?" I asked. You know I didn't quite get why, but in that moment, I was interested on this project.
"Actually yes. I hate to sort of force this on you, but can you do something for me that is not quite in this room? Just check the inside of this ruin area of this ruin place. I have two ear pieces. One for me, and one for you. Just tell me everything you see that you think is important." Izzy told me, handing me the ear piece.
"Sure I can do that. By the way, what are you doing with that claw?" I replied, as we both put our ear pieces in.
"How about this. You do what I asked, and when you are done, I will tell you everything about this new project I am working on. Is that a deal?"
I nodded when he said that. "You got yourself a deal." I looked around for a bit, until I found a door that I could go through to find more of what Izzy wanted. "I will be talking the whole time while searching."
I saw Izzy nodding at me. "That's the way I want it." He said, and I went through the other side of the door to start my speech.
Once I gave my first report about five minutes in, Palmon asked me something. "What makes you want to do this?" I gave a simple response to the question. "I just don't have any real plans. So doing this can make me have something to add to. I feel I done the least so far, so I just want to help at least somebody."
"Mimi you have done stuff. Think about it. Remember when you fought Monzaemon and I digivolved to Togemon?" Palmon tried to assure me.
I noticed one interesting symbol. It was something that looked a tad like a eye, but I also noticed that the pupil was missing. I decided to contact Izzy about it.
"Hey Izzy. Have you seen one symbol that looked like a eye? But it has no pupil in it." I said, and I quickly got a response from Izzy in the earpiece.
"No I haven't. Maybe my computer can help us figure it out." He said, and I stood there with Palmon as I heard him typing on his computer. I heard a small gasp.
"Just what I've been looking for to help me finish my project. You need to get to the farest room in this place, and look two green eye pieces." Izzy told me, and the request seemed a tiny bit odd. I didn't complain about it though.
"Okay. This should be pretty easy to do. I just have to have to the correct direction." I responded, and I started waking once again.
Not even fifty feet later, I heard a voice that I never heard before calling out at me and Palmon.
"Nobody is allowed in my abode. You have my permission to leave this place right now." It said, and raised one of its arms up. I noticed that instead of a hand that it had a gun.
"Izzy, I have some problem that I feel you should be aware of." I tried getting to him again, and I heard him getting ready to talk to me again.
"What is the issue? I heard a voice going directly at you. Is it a servant of Devimon?" I heard the words get out of Izzy's mouth rather quickly. Then I looked at the digimon again, and I saw a black gear on its back.
"Yes it is a servant of Devimon. What do you think I should do about it?" I said, and Izzy paused for a moment.
"You know what. Just try to get out of there, and I will do my best to find you. I guess my project will have to hold off a little bit." Izzy's voice came through just fine. I didn't even reply with a yes sir or anything. I just started running.
The digimon started running right after me. Palmon right my shoulder. "My name is Centaurumon, and this is my place just for me." I heard it trying to scare me. It was their next action that did this just fine.
The Centaurumon started to shoot with that gun hand I mentioned earlier. Seeing the three shots coming at me, I ran away knowing it was the only way.
With a couple minutes of more running, I found a place that just about scared me senseless. It was just giant hole in the middle of a room. Leading down to who knows where.
I looked behind, and saw Centuarumon right behind me. With a tiny bit of actual ground area on either side of the hole, I knew I had to walk on that side to survive.
Palmon made their right on me even harder, and I forced myself across the side as slow as possible. It felt like hours, but I did make it to the other side of the room.
In the side room over, I saw Centaurumon just jump over the hole like it was no problem. I knew for sure that if I wasn't scared before, I was for sure then.
But that was just when I just broke into a full sprint. Going across a entire room space until I reached a final big room.
I knew right then and there that this just had to be the room, and found the two eyes that Izzy wanted. Before Centaurumon found me, I quickly put the eyes in the pocket.
Centaurumon came in, and then the wall collapsed. I looked to my side and saw Izzy holding a large rock. He also had Kabuterimon right next to him.
"Mimi get next to me. You should let Palmon digivolve, so we could take on this one together." Izzy told me, and I ran next to him as my device glowed.
"Palmon digivolve to... TOGEMON!" Palmon yelled, and the cactus has shown itself once again.
"Needle Spray!" Togemon yelled, and Kabuterimon showed up at their side and was ready to attack.
"Solar Ray!" Centaurumon shot from its hand making Kabuterimon and Togemon both. Kabuterimon got themselves up and fired their attack at Centaurumon.
"Electro Shocker!" Kabuterimon said, and it hit Centaurumon pretty bad and made them fall down on the ground. The black gear was starting to fall apart, and the battle was pretty much won.
It got back up, and walked to Izzy and I. "Sorry for what I did." It said, and started a conversation with us.
Izzy and I were barely able to have a conversation with Centaururmon when there was another attack coming for us. It was Leomon, that one thing we fought from Devimon a couple days back. "Izzy, how did it get here?" I asked honestly confused, and Leomon raised their sword up.
"I will kill you as this is what my master wants." Leomon said, and our partners came up to us ready to fight Leomon.
"Electro Shocker!" Kabuterimon shot out another ball of thunder at Leomon, which it blocked wit hits sword. Slashing Kabuterimon a little bit, and the digimon fell back. Going back to Tentomon, which left Togemon and Centaururmon to beat it.
Leomon was ready to attack Togemon when it was trying to throw some needles at Leomon. The sword once again slashed at Togemon, and it went all the back to Palmon.
"I guess that leaves me with you humans now. Devimon will be so proud of my performance after this." Leomon was heading to Izzy, ready to attack him to get rid him.
"Solar Ray!" Centaurumon shot at Leomon, and the attack surprised it. It fired again, and the second time destroyed the black gear on Leomon.
Leomon fell down on the ground, sighing over everything. As if it forgot everything that just happened. "What am I doing? What is going on?"
I went over to Leomon, and touched its back a few times. "You were taken over by Devimon, or do you not know what that digimon is?" I said, and Leomon thought over it for a bit. Then they got back up, as if ready to speak to us in a nice manner.
"Devimon, I know what it is. Can I tell you something. I have a way that you can over throw Devimon." Izzy and I seemed far more interested in what they had to say because of what they had just said right there.
"There are a few tests that you each have to pass. If you do so, then a island piece can be brought back to the island. When it is all done, Devimon is ready to fight you for a big battle. But each of you must do something for it to work. Two of you have already passed the test before you, and you two have now made it four who have passed the test."
"How do you know that we must defeat Devimon? I asked interested. Leomon saw our devices.
"You have digivices, and that is prove. You make digimon digivolve, and that is even more prove. I will go into detail more about it after you others are together and you all can hear it." Leomon said, and left us alone. Centaurumon left us alone to. Our island parts started going to File Island as one. I turned at Izzy, remembering his promise.
"Remember, you said you would explain some stuff like your project to me. Can you do it now." I said, getting the green eyes out of my pocket and handed it to him. He looked at me, and smiled at me excited I did as he wanted.
"Let me get it out." Izzy said, and took his computer out. Turned it on and showed me a picture that I thought was well drawn. "Mimi, meet Festus." Izzy told me, and I saw it looked like a green dragon.
"What is that?" I asked totally confused. He looked at me like he was getting to that point.
"I am making a green dragon named Festus, and I need these parts for it. When we were separated, Ignitemon came to me again and told me of a legend called the Dragon Rider. The legend is that a boy will build a dragon and use it to help defeat a great evil. It won't defeat the evil, but help do so. The boy who makes the dragon is called the Dragon Rider. I want to try this out." Izzy told me, and I nodded. I got it surprisingly.
"I will support you it. If you don't want to have me tell me anybody else if you don't request it." I told him, and he smiled.
"You know, you're not that bad actually." Izzy said, and we looked out at the sun setting as Palmon and Tentomon came next to us. I was glad I did have that moment with Izzy, but I still didn't like him. Perhaps as a friend but that is it.
That was when a digimon came up to us. It had a deep black hat and held its hand out. "What are you?" Izzy asked, and they looked up. Waving their hand again, their hat flew away.
It was Ignitemon once again. The digimon that we met the day prior to coming to Toy Town and when I first got my digivolution. "I have something that I want you guys to do. I won't ask if you want to or not as you don't know what I want you to do."
"Fair enough. What is it that you want us to do though?" Izzy asked, and Ignitemon sighed. as if we were supposed to remember something that we might have forgotten.
"Half of you have passed your tests for Devimon. But that doesn't mean that your are half way to doing all that you need to bring this island to safety. I found location of where one of the seven shadows I told you about are hidden. Actually eight. That eighth one I mention earlier is for sure real. One of them has been destroyed, so now seven. If you do this test, I may have info that both of you would need to fight Devimon." Ignitemon explained.
That part was what got us interested. "Where is the shadow?" I asked, and Ignitemon pointed to a worn down house.
"It is in that ride. It used to be a amusement ride place for digimon until it was destroyed. It is a roller coaster place. The shadow has been wandering around there for a while. I lost a valuable item there. That is more important. Even if you can't beat it you need to get that item at all costs." Ignitemon said, and it seemed simple enough.
"I guess we could afford some time to do it." Izzy said, and looked at me. I nodded. Knowing that my thoughts of him must be pushed to the side and I have to work with him. Despite how annoying he may be in my eyes.
"Let's head out. We should split up one we are there. Us with our partners." I suggested, and Izzy agreed.
Once we got close to the roller coaster, which sounded to be the least serious place that a evil thing could be a hiding place in if you asked me we did split up. I went right, and Izzy went left. I wondered what the item that Ignitemon was looking for was. Perhaps it was like some sort of strange momento would be my guess. You never know with this place was one thing I have for sure learned from this digital world.
"Mimi, have you ever been to a roller coaster?" Palmon asked, and I stopped. I fell on my knees for a moment, and started crying really bad. A certain really bad memory I tried to get out of my memory replaying.
"I did once. My babysitter Anthony came with me. He took me there. He was fourteen years older than me, and he was the greatest person ever. I was only nine." I couldn't explain it anymore without getting angry. Palmon went up to me, and hugged me. "He was the one that started my personal preferences for older guys. Ever since him, I have been attracted to older men." I didn't want to reveal what happened to him, but it made me sad. Perhaps I will sometime.
I knew that I had to get myself back up to look for the item Ignitemon was looking for. Palmon and I didn't talk about what had just happened for a little bit. Palmon was able to see with my face alone that I didn't want to talk about it at all.
I looked in a trash can for some off reason. Maybe the most important item in ever is hidden in a trash can. Just kidding. I just thought that some humor in what is going on would be best for me right now. I decided to get a little closer to the center of this place and started heading to the roller coaster itself. I didn't have to see anything to know that I was making far more progress by going to this place than I had been going around in general.
Still I wondered what would be in there. Maybe I would have to find a way to get up the seats and maybe it is upward towards the top. I had a idea. One that was terrible and could got both me and Palmon killed. But it was better than nothing at all.
"Hey Palmon, maybe you should digivolve to Togemon and destroy this ride so the things would fall down and we see if our target is up there." I said, and Palmon didn't like the idea which was no surprise. They still digivolved anyways.
"Needle Spray!" Togemon yelled, and did that attack three times before the wheel broke down and fell down bit by bit. We had to run away about a hundred yards or so. After all the noise was done, I held my head up. It was safe enough for me to go back, an Togemon was right behind me. Izzy heard the noise and came to us right away.
"What the heck happened?" Izzy asked super shocked. I shrugged getting a tiny smile.
"I thought of destroying the roller coaster to see if Ignitemon's item is here or buried I should say. Let's go looking." I told him, and he without wanting to by the way joined me in looking in the destroyed coaster.
"I wonder what is so important anyways." Izzy muttered under his breath, and I silently agreed. Also does Ignitemon think that they're secretly super important just because of this item? Unless if they were supposed to take it somewhere.
"Are you the least bit curious what Ignitemon is doing all this time? Just showing up then leaving then showing up again. Makes me a little concerned honestly." I told Izzy, and he didn't reply for a moment. Togemon was doing a better job getting the destroyed ruins away than either Izzy and I. Tentomon was just sort of following Izzy's lead.
"I don't really care what it is doing on there own honestly. They seem to know what they are doing so I can't complain. They also have good advice every once in a while. Which is very nice." Izzy gave his answer, and Togemon looked like they were getting at least a item out of the ruins.
When Togemon pulled the item out of the place we got to see what it was. It looked like a golden shield. I was more confused on how it didn't get dirty from all the stuff that right down on it. Compared to the other stuff we dealt with so far here, I guess that makes some sense.
That was when the place started getting a little cold. I had a bad feeling right away as you might have guessed. Izzy and I turned around and saw a shadowy looking figure. I knew right away it was one of the seven shadows coming over to us. Perhaps for the shield.
Well at least it showed that we did find Ignitemon's item. That wasn't really worth it though because of being tracked down by this thing. Izzy looked at me directly in the eyes. Like he was about to make a request for all of us.
"We need to start running from it. You know that we are not powerful enough. We need to leave. Hopefully Ignitemon has a way to secure us once we reach it. That might be our only safe option." As usual, I had a feeling that he was right. So with that, we started getting away from the roller coaster.
I told Togemon to go back to Palmon, and Izzy had Tentomon digivolve to Kabuterimon so we could all jump on their backs and we could fly away faster. With its picked up pace, the shadow got even faster. Holding out their ghostly hand and trying to grab us when it thought it was close enough. The surprise that it wasn't was enough for them to be confused for a split second. Kabuterimon flew away even faster to get away from the shadow faster with that small chance.
We were half way back to Ignitemon before I even considered to look back. I saw it within three feet of us, and it had a sword in its hand ready to strike. I looked in front of me once again to see if we had got any closer.
It looked like we were right near Ignitemon. Izzy knew that we had to get close to it and try to throw the shield at it to save us some time and trouble. This felt like a intense action movie. I didn't know how to exactly feel about it now.
When we were about five feet away Izzy threw the shield right at Ignitemon and we jumped right off of Kabuterimon and landed in front of Ignitemon. "So you found it and you had a little encounter." I thought there might have been a tad laugh with that response. Then it touched the shield and a beam ray circled around us. Ignitemon took a weapon out of their bag. It looked like a lance. I didn't bother to ask what it was for.
"Both of your partners need to digvolve and be close to them. Trust me you will be glad to listen to me." Ignitemon told us, and looked at the shadow which was right in front of us. "The barrier will break. I just wanted to give us a few seconds to get ready."
With that, we did both digivolve and listen to their advice. They looked worried for some reason. Like everything as depending on this one moment. The shadow kept slashing their sword over the barrier for a while until the barrier broke. When they did, Ignitemon stabbed the lance right in the shadows chest. Making them wounded. Both Kabuterimon and Togemon attacked the shadow making them more hurt.
The shadow dropped their sword, and Ignitemon took another stab at the shadow. Taking the lance out of their body for the second time. Dropping the lance, and looked at the shield we found. "Thanks both of you." Ignitemon told us, and was almost about to leave when Izzy said something to it.
"Didn't you say that you had some info for us?" Ignitemon nodded to what Izzy said, and handed Izzy another jar. In it was a scale.
"That will help you with your project. Mimi will know what I am talking about if you told her." Then Ignitemon looked at me. Nodding, like it knew what to say to me. "It may not seem like it yet but your group will need you. Very much so. Nothing will be better than opening yourself up more. Even if you take small steps. One last thing, I feel sorry for what happened to Anthony all those years ago."
Right as Ignitemon was truly about to leave, they turned back one last time and said one final thing to us. "If you are wondering how I was able to defeat the shadow so easily. First was the moment. Second was you two helping. Third and lastly was the fact that I am a ultimate level digimon. I won't explain what that is, as you will find someone who will tell you. Watch out for the old man. He is part of the great council who will tell everything to you and the group."
With that, Ignitemon has truly left us. Izzy looked at me worried. "Who is Anthony?" I sighed, and was near tears again.
"A babysitter and the man I will never forget. I will tell you. Only when everyone in the group is together." I told Izzy and sat down. Izzy was next to me, and we were looking at the island getting closer to Devimon's center. It is only a matter of hours before we are back there, and only a matter of hours before we see how many are ready to fight it.
"I have a problem concerning my family that I want to talk about. Like you though, I feel as though I should wait first though. So we are in the same shoes in a way." Izzy told me, and that me feel a tad better. I decided to tell him something a little personal.
"I will only tell you this. So don't tell anybody else this." I said, and Izzy nodded like he got it. "I talked to Sora once about the people in the group. She said she had a crush on Joe at one point but got over it by now. She is no longer focused on him. She said she is starting to like another guy in the group, but she wouldn't say. I had a talk with Joe one night recently, and we understood each other well despite our stories not relating. The reason I say this is because I feel I am starting to like Joe myself. I know the cheerleader and the nerd, bad mix. That is why it is a secret. Plus, I'm only in eighth grade, and Joe is a senior at high school. That part doesn't bother me though, as I like older guys. Still, it would be against the law if we wet out sadly."
Izzy put his hand on my shoulder. "It seems you have a knowledge of more things I ever gave you credit for. I would have never guessed it before, but I am starting to see you as a friend. Perhaps this situation was the best for us. These talks really made me open my minds. Thanks for being supportive of my project." I smiled when he said all that.
"Thanks Izzy. You know even like ten minutes ago I wouldn't have considered it. But I am starting to look at you as a friend myself now. Let's make sure this doesn't get ruined." With that, we truly were done for the day. We honestly both just fell asleep after I said that.
----
Chapter 13: The Dancing Digimon
Chapter Narrated by Joe
It was night time when I was about to throw up from being out at sea for so long. Gomamon was trying to comfort me by singing. Which wasn't helping at all honestly. In fact, it kind of made me feel even more sick. I threw up over the bed and into the water. Then I felt all better
I decided to check out the medical bag that I had with us. Might as well make some use of it while we are out here. Right?
Besides, I haven't checked out in a while what we had in there. I pulled out some band-aids, alcohol oil for your skin, some tape which I didn't quite get honestly, and some toilet paper. The last item made me want to throw up again out of in a rage. I mean what good is toilet paper going to do on water. Then I thought about it, and came to different conclusions outside of that.
"Being here has become so boring. Doth thou hath any suggestions of stuff we can do in our time waiting to get to land?" Gomamon told me, and I lowered my head. I was wondering the same thing in a odd way. I also wondered if there would be any members of the group where I am going. Personally I would have liked to see T.K. though. Not sure why, but I feel most close to him so far.
"Maybe there will be a nice place to eat food where we are going." I grumbled, and laid down on the bed. Even the pillow was hard to be on. "Why does being on the ocean suck so dang much?"
Then I put my hand in my pocket. For no reason really. That was when I felt something in there. I took it out, and saw a wallet. I had forgotten I even had one. Because there was no need for me to have used it while we have been in the digital world. Trust me, that type of thing would make you forget that stuff to.
Anyways, I started looking through my wallet. Just wanting to see what was inside of it. In it was twenty five dollars, a address card to Sarah's house, and some pictures that I forgot I even had in there. Such as one I had taken in ninth grade.
I noticed that I wore a lot of the same stuff that I did I was now. The white shirt, light brown shorts, the same glasses, and even the shoes were almost identical. I had realized that I had been wearing in some ways the same type of clothing since eighth grade. Just difference in my size. Sort of made me feel stupid a little bit.
My hair wasn't much better now either. It was relatively super spiky back then. Which didn't make since for my general appearance these days. I was wondering why I was this way back then. I showed the picture to Gomamon.
"Thou looked awful back then." Gomamon told me, and I nodded. I knew it was true though.
"What was I even thinking back then?" I put the picture back in my wallet, and fell my full body back down on the bed again. Sighing, and turned to my side. I wasn't doing much better than I was back a moment ago. In fact, that picture may have ruined my mood even more than before.
"Don't worry bout it." Gomamon told me, and I let out a long sigh in return. As it was the best reply I had with me at the moment.
"Promise me one thing Gomamon. Never tell anybody about that picture again. For my sake please." I knew for sure that the sea wasn't helping my mood soon as I said that.
"Okay whatever thou say Joe. How long hath we been on this bed by now?" Gomamon asked, and I forced myself to concentrate and think about it.
"I think a couple days now." I told Gomamon. I was surprised that we haven't gotten hungry yet. I would have expected it. Whatever. Not like it was very important where we were heading.
"I think I will try to get a little shut eye." I told Gomamon, and closed my eyes.
I started having a bit of a flash back, but it was being interrupted by the constant wave motions. Also for some reason I kind of feared that something really bad was going to happen. It was bothering me really badly. "What if something attacks us?" I told myself under my breath, and that really wasn't helping my mood at all. Why did I have to be such a downer sometimes?
Then I heard something I knew was not Gomamon trying to pester me or even my stomach growling. I gulped nervous as I turned around to see what it was.
I saw that it was a box. Which made me relax a little bit. Just a little. There was still some part of me that was worried something really bad was about to happen.
Out of being curious and wondering what would be in the box, I tapped the box. It shook a little bit, which made me a little more worried. Then I saw a part of it break. That was when I was really starting to get worried.
With a second crack that was even larger than the first, I saw it starting to fully break off. Gomamon broke some of the part of the bed off so we could use it as paddles. Gomamon threw one to me, and they had the second one for themselves.
Together, we started pushing as hard as we could to make the bed get further away from the box. Our plan was stopped when the box fully broke and out came Ogremon.
"Oh no! What are we going to do?" I screamed, and then Gomamon ran right to me in fear.
"Perhaps we can beg for it to leave us." Gomamon suggested, and I nodded. But I knew that it would never turn out that way.
"Paddle harder." I told it, and we kept going. I was tempted to scream a little bit. Soon I thought that we were getting away from the Ogremon.
Then I heard a large crack on the bed. I turned around to see what that was for. I noticed that Ogremon struck the bed with their club, breaking it in half.
"Gomamon. Jump here right now. I will get you." I told my partner, and Gomamon looked honestly worried. Then nodded, and jumped as far as it could. It was a lot harder to catch it than I thought. I had to get up and stretch my arms up in order to get it.
When we were both together again, Ogremon faced us. Then took their club, and raised it.
"Joe, I have to digivolve." Gomamon pestered me. I didn't want it to happen. However, I knew that it was correct. The best we could do was get it done faster so Gomamon could get fighting with Ogremon sooner.
"Gomamon digivolve to... IKKAKUMON!" Gomamon yelled, and then my digimon turned at me.
"Get on me right now." I nodded, and climbed up on Ikkakumon so we could get away. Ogremon followed us for a little bit until Ikkakumon was ready to shot it.
"Harpoon Torpedo!" Ikkakumon yelled hitting Ogremon. It hurt Ogremon for a moment. But when they got over it, they didn't move for a moment. Ikkakumon started riding away even faster than it was before.
Ogremon was ready to return a attack towards us, and their club at us. It hit Ikkakumon for a little bit, making it slower.
We were alone for a little while. Ikkakumon was riding on for a bit before I noticed that it was needing to just slow down. I looked at their face, and saw that Ikkakumon might need to rest. However, I knew that it couldn't. As we were not on land.
"Joe, I am running out of energy. I don't know how much longer I can last before I just need to rest." Ikkakumon was telling me. I didn't mind that it needed a break nearly as much as I am not good at swimming. Unless land was near, then I would have to find a way to swim to the land. Which would be almost impossible for me.
"You tried at least." I said worried. Ikkakumon was glowing as they started getting smaller. I knew for sure that it wasn't able to go on any longer. I was getting ready for almost drowning. I mean that might not have been the case. But it was very likely considering me and my situation.
Soon that Gomamon was back to normal, they started sinking under water. I was soon following down with them. I was trying to resist for a little bit, before I gave up. Being three feet under made me quit.
I saw the moon. How nice it looked. Shining even better under water. I was starting to have a flashback, despite it fading away almost as quick. The flashback, or what I was able to make out of it was Jim and I going to a place to eat. That was all I got.
Then when I eyes shut, I felt my body getting touched by something. I didn't really care though. I was just going down now. Suddenly my body felt much colder, and I was able to breath just fine. Which I didn't get actually. Then again, my eye were closed. So I wouldn't get it.
What I didn't know was that I was at land again and Gomamon was trying to get me in better resting condition.
Sora and Biyomon were there and it turned out that the thing coiled around Joe that he felt was a fishing line going around him. Gomamon even explained it all to the two.
"When I saw the fishing line, I knew dat tis was the one chance dat I had to get him out of the water. So I wrapped him around the line and I had no clue dat it was thy two though. Thanks for happening to be there for us." Gomamon said, and Sora looked at my sleeping body.
"We need to get him in a nice situation. Or as nice as you can be in this whole thing. Let's do it right now." Sora said, and the digimon started working on me getting comfortable.
They put some leaves from trees on the ground and started a fire for me. They laid me down on the leaves, and right next to the fire. One of them took the glasses for me, and I tilted my face to my left side. I was breathing a little easier with the new lay out that they gave me.
"Sora, what are you thinking?" Biyomon asked, and Sora was taken out of her thoughts.
"Nothing with you personally. I was for a while convinced that I had a crush on this guy. Now I feel that I was wrong. I never did have romantic feelings for him. I just thought I did. I respect the guy, but I don't love him. But this is good for me. Because I can open my eyes and check out some of the other people out. Seeing somebody who I do have romantic feelings for. So this was a good and bad experience both in a way." Sora told Biyomon, and her digimon sat down next to her.
I didn't hear any of this. I only knew of it because of Sora telling me after our little adventure here. I was surprised with the not so crush confession, but that hardened our friendship. But that is for later, and I need to get back on the current topic.
Gomamon looked the most worried about me. Mainly because I was their human partner. So it wouldn't have to deal with what would have happened if I didn't make it.
"Wilt Joe live? I am scared that he won't. What doth thou think Sora?" Gomamon told her. Sora sighed and took another breath following that.
"Yeah I think he will be safe. I am thinking that his self confidence must not be that great because of this. How about this. When he wakes up again, we make him leader for the mean time while we are alone here. After wards he can resign and not be leader anymore. Just for a short term of time." Sora made the suggestion that for almost any situation outside of the digital world I would have freaked out. But given where we were I couldn't care less.
"Yeah sure whatever you think Sora." Biyomon replied, and then they saw me turning around really bad. Like I was having a bad dream. I wasn't, but that flash back I mentioned earlier was replaying in my mind again.
-In my dream, I was seeing Jim driving around and I was talking to him back. "Jim, do you want to take a break so we could have something to eat?" I asked, and Jim didn't answer for about five or so seconds. Then shrugged in approval.
"I guess a little meal is going to be mostly harmless. Let's go and find a place to eat." Jim replied, and I put my back against the car seat again. I was pretty young at the time I was able to see by my looks. Maybe thirteen or fourteen.
We continued driving for about two or three minutes and then we came across the Subway. Jim decided that this was going to be the place that we were going to be eating at. Not that I really cared anyways. I was just getting hungry, so I was down for anything. But that meant that I had to get my food ready.
As we pulled up, we walked on out and went to the counter that the food was at for us to order. We both gave our orders and the person gave us our food. The two of us went to the table and unwrapped the sand which. Because let's be honest here. We wouldn't want to have a Subway sand which the paper on it. That would be gross.
On our way to the table, I found a guy who was about my age. Perhaps a little older. I knew who he was though.
"Sam. How are you doing?" I got his attention, and Sam looked up as he was pointing down at sand which he was having.
"Just taking a break from studies. So I can have this nice food to eat. Our school year is almost over. I'm starting high school next year, and Ken is starting middle school next year." Sam told me, and I then remembered Ken, his younger brother.
"Yeah how is he doing on his school year? Tell him that I said hello and hope he does well in middle school." I continued the conversation a little bit.
"I will tell him. As usual, his grades are a little average. He isn't really failing any classes. But he isn't passing any classes either. If you get what I mean. He has about D's and C's in all his classes." Sam finished the talk with that answer of my question.
I held my hand up, and waved it as I walked on over to the table. Sitting down, Jim looked at me. Wondering who the heck it was I was talking to.
"His name is Sam. He's a grade older than me. I get along with him decently well. Not like he's my best friend or anything. But a pretty good talk to person when we walk by each other." I told Jim, and we started eating our food.
About half way through my sand which, I saw a ball coming in our direction. Totally confused, I didn't do anything about it. I just watched the ball coming towards me. It hit my leg, and then rolled a tiny bit away from me before stopping.
A girl came up to me, and got the ball. She looked at me, and smiled. Like she was fooled by doing this.
"Sorry for doing that. I was just careless. Won't happen again. See you again someday I think." The girl said, and walked away from us. She sat down with her male friend. They looked about ten or eleven.
"Sora, don't lose my ball like that again. That guy doesn't want to deal with that again. Nor does anybody else really." The male said, and the girl laughed.
"Don't worry about it Tai. Why do you get so worried about some of the silliest stuff?" The girl, younger Sora told the male, younger Tai.
A couple minutes later, we finished eating our food. Not really ever thinking about that girl and ball that came towards us. Jim and I got up and went to our car. Jim decided it was time for us to go home.
I didn't get it until I looked back and saw two people. One male and one female. The male had black hair and the female had blonde hair. Both were a tad shorter than him. "Why are Koji and Zoe here?" I heard Jim mutter under his breath. I decided not to ask what he was talking about.
Jim started driving again, and didn't slow down until we were fifty feet away from the Subway. On our way back, I noticed to hear some people who were young kids talking to their parents.
Such as one boy who was in the back seat of his car. "Mom, isn't it a little hot?" The young kid asked, and the mom turned down the heat in the car.
"There you go Izzy." His mother said, and I noticed that the dad wasn't there. Izzy randomly burst something out.
"Are there any good looking guys at your work place?" His mom looked at him confused but didn't reply until our car was almost too far ahead for us to hear anything.
"I don't know if that was serious or not. I am assuming that this was just a random comment." His mother said, and that was all that I heard from that car.
When we pulled up to a place for a moment, I saw a younger girl walking around with her parents.
"Mommy, how long do you think it will take for me to get used to this place? I still can't believe Anthony is gone." She spoke to her mother, and her mother patted her shoulder.
"I don't know how long it will take for you to get used to this place. It really depends on what you do. I agree, Anthony being gone is a big deal. He was a big deal to even us. I knew he really did mean a lot to you mostly Mimi." Her mother knelt down so they could be looking at each other directly in the eyes.
"Mom, do you think that guy is good looking?" I saw her pointing at a older guy. Who was like in his thirties or forties. Her mother glanced at the guy confused.
"I don't know about that. That is your point of view though. So I can't judge." Jim came back from using the bathroom. That was the point of the break. Once he got back in, he started the car up again and pulled out. Driving back to our house.
Once he came back to our living area, we walked up to our part of the complex. Once he was opening the door, I saw two guys leaving. One was actually staying here with their father, and the other was going away with their mother.
"Dad, do you think T.K. will be alright with mom alone?" One of the guys, the one who was close to us and looked a little older yelled.
"I don't know Matt. I guess it truly depends on how their relationship grows." The guys father told him, and I walked into our area in the complex. Going back to my business like nothing happened.-
I woke up, and saw Gomamon staring at me. With Sora and Biyomon next to it. I got myself up, and wiped my clothes off getting ready to wander around again. I guess I would have to take Sora and Biyomon along with Gomamon and I. As they might have partly taken care of me.
I didn't have to worry about that for a little while longer, because I then got a phone call.
I wonder who would even call me at this time. So I checked the caller ID. It was my brother Jim. "Hold on guys." I told the others when I saw that and took the call.
With that, I walked a little bit away so I was alone with the phone so Jim and I could have a more private talk.
"Hello. What is it that you need?" I said when I answered the phone. Jim's voice came in soon reply.
"I have a problem right now. I don't know where you are and what you are doing. But can you spend a couple minutes to listen to me?" I thought about it for about a minute or so. Not like it really mattered. I knew I was going to say yes.
"Yeah sure. I can spend a few minutes talking to you. What is the problem?" I responded, waiting for Jim's response.
"My girlfriend Heather has now broken up with me. After three years, we have finally torn apart. I really thought that we were going to get married, but it didn't turn out that way. It turns out that she has been cheating on me for the last few months. I hate it how people do that. I mean seriously if you are going to leave somebody for another person, just end it then. Don't be secretly going after another person before then. It is just disrespectful." Jim told me, and I groaned. I agree, that is the worst type of break up.
"Don't worry about it Jim. I have a feeling that someday you will move on and find another girl for you. I am not sure how, who, or when. I just have a odd feeling that it will happen. I hope that I am right." I replied, and Jim was silent. I thought I heard a tear nearly coming
"Are you crying?" I asked, and there was silence was once again.
"A little bit. Just again three years of this relationship. You are right possibly. Perhaps I will find somebody for me in the future. I really do hope that you are right. I might have to let you go now." That was when I thought of something else.
"Where is dad? Is he at all concerned about where I am and how I am doing? If so just tell him that I am out for the moment." I gave a final message for Jim.
"I will do that. He is at home with me right now. He hasn't mentioned it yet. So I doubt that he is too worried about it. Don't worry, I will still inform him there." Jim replied, and I sighed.
"Thanks. Goodbye." I truly did give my final words to him at least for now.
"Okay. Goodbye." Jim said, and we both hung our phones up. I hung up to. Then I knew that I should probably return to Gomamon and the others. I put the phone in my pocket, and headed to them.
Once there, I sat myself down. Looking at Sora, Gomamon, and Biyomon. I wondered if they were going to ask what the phone call was about.
I was right. "Who called and what was that about?" Sora asked, and I really didn't want to talk about it.
"I don't want to talk about it please. Can we think about something else for the moment?" I told her my thoughts. I just hoped that she would understand where I was coming from.
"Okay. I will let you do that. So now, let's talk about something else. What are we going to do about our situation and how are we going to find the others?" Sora replied, and I thought about it for a moment.
"Hate to sound like captain obvious here, but we are going to have to find to go around to find them. We can't find the people just staying around here. But one problem, which direction will we take?" I had to think about where we could possibly go.
"Sure. I think you are right. But I think you should lead us upon this. It is going to be for a small period of time though. Can you please do it?" Sora answered, and I thought I saw Gomamon and Biyomon force nodding. Like they were playing along with something.
"I don't want to, but I guess I have to." I responded and I forced myself up. Then I pointed in my right direction.
"An open path is right there. Besides, I don't know if you have even walked that way. I know I haven't." Now I was for sure being the captain obvious.
Sora and the two digimon nodded with what I said. So I guessed they didn't disapprove of it too badly. With that, we started in the direction I pointed at.
It was really dark when we headed off. I mean dark like even couldn't even see like three steps ahead of us. That why I wasn't surprised when i hit my head against a tree. Wouldn't be surprised if I had a bump on my head.
Sora kind of laughed when I did so. To be fair though, I might have done the same thing reaction wise. I didn't let it bother me as we walked further on. Going until I thought I saw something a small distance away.
"I want to check it out." I told Sora as I was walking closer and the digimon followed me a little unwantingly though.
Once I got to the area I thought I saw something, I noticed it was another digimon.
It was wearing a purple robe and I would even say feeling to it. Not that it mattered, I could have still been interested in what it would tell me.
"Hello. What is your name?" I introduced myself to the digimon. "My name is Joe, and the other human is named Sora. Our digimon are named Gomamon and Biyomon." The digimon digimon smiled.
"My name is Daemon. Could I bother you for a couple minutes so I can tell you a small story? It has something to do with Devimon. I have a feeling you would like to hear it." The digimon's offer was hard to refuse because of the Devimon part.
"I'm interested. I think we can spend a few minutes hearing this." All of us sat down to listen to the elder digimon speak. Only a few seconds later did I make the connection. The servant of Devimon has was called Daemon, and this was named Daemon. What if the two digimon were connected?
"Okay listen closely. I will only tell you guys this once." Daemon set a fire with their finger so we could see it better.
"I am related to Devimon. I will get that out of the way first. Several thousand years ago, I was once called Seraphimon. I had two children. Both of them were angels, literally. Over time, both of them faced some disagreements. Until once of the children killed the other one. I was in grief from the action, and the child that survived became more evil. Into a devil. He was once named Angemon, and he is now Devimon. I traveled around for a while seeing the different places in the digital world. Slowly losing my title of Seraphimon, the most powerful digimon of all at one point. I lost my title and gained this title of Daemon. I don't want to, but Devimon is forcing me to be their right hand man. I won't fight you because I just wanted to tell you this. I will head out now. " Daemon told us their interesting story as they snapped their fingers. We were now alone.
I was thinking about what Daemon had told me. They were connected with Devimon. But not willingly. So I was willing to forgive them.
"Joe look!" Sora yelled at me, and I saw what she was talking about. I saw a church. Not believing what I was seeing, I ran up a giant hill to see if it was true. Sora and out partners followed us to.
It was true. I did see a church. What would they even worship? Wait, that is way off topic. Anyways, we checked out what the church was like right away.
At first I couldn't believe my eyes. I thought for a moment that we saw humans. Like actual humans, and not digimon that just looked a lot like them. I really hoped that I wasn't going insane here. I would need to be checked if I was starting to go insane.
Sora was curious about it as well, so we started walking closer to some of them. When we got within tapping distance, I tapped one of them on their shoulder. They turned around, and I saw that they had a really happy smile mask. That detail did make me a little bit odd feeling as you may say. Still I didn't let it bother me though.
"Who are you?" The one I tapped on the shoulder asked, and I didn't respond for a second. I was curious what they are doing here for the main reason.
"Some people from my summer camp got sucked here with me, and we have been trying really hard for a while to get out. Do you know any advice?" I answered, and that was the biggest mistake.
"You are the people we have been looking for actually. Come on in closer. We have a great surprise for you." The human told us, and that was the start to a alarm in my head. But I nor did any one of the others say anything as the human led us inside.
Inside the church was another human, and I was fearing what could be coming. They looked so happy though, that I didn't comment on it right away.
"Oh you must be so tired. Let me take care of you for the moment. You know you want it." The human said, and led us a little more into the church. To the end of the hall, and showed us their biggest window.
"This is our prize from our master. They gave it to us if we did something in return. That is to treat all the humans that come by with the best of feelings. Now tell me, why are you here?" The humans tone was scaring me more the more I thought about it.
"If you don't mind, I don't think we should be here. We took a really bad turn. Now can we head out without hurting your feelings?" I knew I sounded like a jerk, but I was desperate at the moment, and had nothing else to say.
"Sorry but we must get you to the master. They would really want to see you." The human told us, as they took their skin off. Wait, took their skin off? That was what happened, and it showed that they weren't really human at all. Just another digimon that was a ghost. I had a feeling that the master the ghost was talking about was Devimon.
We were about to make a run for it and get away when another ghost digimon from either side of us grabbed us and some even grabbed our partners.
"I wouldn't try to do anything at the moment. I might just accept that you are going to be our prized dinner. We Bakemon as ghost so rarely get anything good to eat it is almost sad. You will provide a exception here and now." The lead ghost said as they took our digimon down under.
The Bakemon threw us on a stone lay out and tied us up in rope. To the point where it was impossible to get out of it, and there was no point in even resisting. I hated it when I was fully helpless.
I closed my eyes and thought I slept through hours or was dead when I opened them again. I was still tied up with Sora next to me.
"How much time has past?" I asked, as I looked out the window. It looked like perhaps a hour or two had gone by.
"How am I supposed to know? I am tied up like you." She told me, and I felt like a little bit of a idiot because of that. With that, the head Bakemon was coming up to us.
"I hope you are well ready to be eaten soon." The Bakemon told us, and that did not make me feel any better. I gritted my teeth a little bit, and they started touching us up and down our bodies.
"Get off of me." I was actually the one to say that, and not Sora. I then heard what I thought for a moment could have been a earthquake. Stupid me though, it was just our partners breaking out somehow and coming to save our lives at their digivovled stage.
Ikkakumon cut our ropes while Bidramon led them outside. I got myself up, feeling how cramped up I really was from staying in that place without pretty much any movement for a while. It was really hard for me to let myself start moving again.
Sora wasn't doing much better. In fact, she might have actually been doing worse than I was. But that didn't matter, as we were forced to move anyways because most of the ghosts were right behind us.
Once outside, we hid behind some graves. I know, real heroic, and waited for the Bakemon to show up. Didn't take long for that to happen. They came right out and started getting ready to eat us again. All of them even combined into one big Bakemon which actually scared me for a moment.
I thought for a moment. How could we defeat this thing? Then it hit me. Something my father actually taught me that I could use.
"Sora listen to me for a moment. Something my father gave to me as a lesson that I think we can use to defeat this thing." I said, and that seemed to get her attention. So I explained it to her.
"It's called mind over matter. You use one chant over and over again to make them weaker and almost give into weakness. I can use this to make them smaller and then we can attack them again when they are normal size. Can I use for hat?" Sora did give me her hat, and I used a small piece of stick to do my thing. I got myself in what my father would call the zone. If we came out of this, I would thank my father in person for at least this.
"Bakemon go away. Bakemon go away. Bakemon go away. Bakemon go away. Bakemon go away." I repeated quite a few times until it got smaller with each repetition. I knew I had done my goal. It looked small enough for us to attack it now.
"Let's attack it now." I demanded, and our partners shot their attacks at the Bakemon, making them blow up. Silence for a moment, and I saw our island piece getting closer to the main center point. I had felt that if this were a test, we would have passed.
"Wow that was crazy. But I will not be leader again. Now we can rest for a little bit. That is going to be really nice. Just rest." I spoke for the first time in about a minute. Sora looked at me.
"Something odd I wanted to tell you. I thought I had a crush on you. Like romantically. But over time, I realize I don't. Not in the way that I hate you. I still respect you. Just not in the romantic way. I would much rather be a friend of yours. In fact, I want to be a friend of yours. I just don't want to be your lover. If you can forgive that. Can we shake on it?" Sora told me, and I shook her hand. Ikkakumon and Birdramon went back to their usual forms, and we just set up our sleeping grounds for the night. We all needed a break. But soon Devimon was near. We needed the rest badly.
----
Chapter 14: The Digi-Baby Boom
Chapter Narrated by T.K.
It was night time when I saw that my bed was flying right towards a island piece. I didn't have any idea what I was going to do if I broke one of my body parts from this flying.
Patomon was screaming right alongside me, and I wasn't going to stop eve if it wasn't.
We were about half way down when I realized that this was my part of the island. I saw several parts of the island going back to the center, and this was one of the few parts that wasn't. So I figured I must have been the only one who hasn't done anything to impress Devimon.
"What if this is the end of me?" I asked afraid, and I was holding my face as the bed slammed into the island. I felt several ounces of pain fly onto me when I landed on the island piece.
Soon as I landed, I then thought of something from my past. Like one of my friends and how we met. His name was Davis, and both of us are very different in personality. This is my flashback.
It was the first day of fifth grade, and I was walking down to school and noticed a guy on a soccer field practicing.
I was very curious on who was playing on the soccer. I walked up to him to at least introduce myself to him. "Hello, who are you?" I asked, and the guy looked at me for a second. He put the soccer ball down and held his hand out. I shook it as he was telling me his name.
My name is Davis Motomiya. What grade are you in?" Davis asked, and I told him.
"Fifth grade, what grade are you in? I guess you are a fan of soccer." I replied, and Davis looked down at the soccer ball for a second.
"I'm also in the fifth grade. Yes I like soccer. I should probably head on over to class soon. I think that there are only a few minutes left before the first period bell rings." Davis picked the ball up, and kept it held in his left arm. He had his right index finger pointed up. "Hey, do you mind hanging out with me later today? Like perhaps after school or something." I thought of it for a second, and I nodded a little excited.
"Yeah sure. I would like to do that. Thanks for asking me." I replied, and the class bell rang and we had to go on over to our lesson. That was the end of my first flashback, since I had two flashbacks about Davis.
It was about two days or so after that meeting. When we were starting to become friends and we met this one girl. Davis must have known about this girl since he talked about her a little bit after we met her.
She had purple hair, and was a little bit taller than Davis and I. She had a little bit of tan skin and really big glasses. At first she didn't seem that bad. But over time, she was starting to annoy me a little bit.
Davis seemed to already know quite a bit about her for some reason. "Her name is Yolei. She is in the fourth grade, one below us. She is quite a fun person sometimes." He explained to me, and what we were doing with us was playing a game with us during the lunch period.
The game was UNO. A game that I was okay with. I like it enough for me to play it when I have to. But I figured out with the last few days I hung out with Davis, that he felt the same way about it that I did. This Yolei girl just loved it.
We were playing the game for the entire lunch period and ended with only about two or three minutes left of the period. She was about to leave when she waved at Davis. "Good to see you." Davis and I got up then and I groaned in annoyance.
"Gosh she was so annoying. Talking about all the stuff that is going on at home and what she was going to be doing after school. We really don't want to know or really care to know about that." I told Davis, and Davis looked at me.
"Perhaps we care a little bit about what she said. Wouldn't you admit there was at least a part or two that you were slightly interested in?" Davis told me, and I actually thought about it for a second. I shook my head as we were heading off to our classes. That was the end of my second flashback and I woke up from my landing on my beach ground.
I got myself up, and sighed very heavily. I looked at Patomon tired. My digimon looked at me very concerned. "T.K., do you know how long you have been out? How long do you think you were asleep?"
"I don't know. Perhaps twelve or so hours." I made my guess, and my digimon shook their head. I knew right then and there that what I guessed was very wrong.
"No not even close. You were asleep, no let me correct that to passed out for over two days. That landing on the ground from the storm really took you out." My digimon responded, and I got up brushing the dirt off of my clothes. I was shaking my head wildly.
"What do you think we should do?" I asked, and my digimon didn't respond.
"I don't know. I think that if we walk around for a little while we will find a digimon that will want to help us a little bit. I think that this is the best way for us to really find out about where we are or what we will do about getting back to the others." Patomon said, and I found my hat on the ground. I picked it up and put it back on my head.
"Yeah you're right. Let's go. Look's like we're near a forest. More of that because we haven't been around a forest enough while travelling around this island." I started walking towards what I said just earlier started walking to the forest.
At the forest, the trees did look nice mainly because of the difference in a lot of the trees. Like some of them were pink, which I figured Mimi would love. A few of the trees had one natural branch while some others had like hundreds of branches all over them. Even one or two of them had some secondary trees growing out of some of the branches. I will admit, I was a little jealous that all these forests had these types of differences in how they looked.
About a few minutes later, the sun was starting to kill me. You know in the way that it was starting to make you sweat more than a fountain coming out. Maybe not that much, but still pretty bad.
We found a nice bit a shade and I quickly went under it. Maybe not for a break as must as just wiping all the sweat off of my face. When I did, my shirt looked like it was a totally different color. Like a darker green than lighter. That I found very, very gross.
"Do humans normally sweat this much when they are walking under the sunlight?" Patomon asked me, and I made a laugh that was meant to be a sighed chuckle.
"Depends on how hot the area is and how much we walk also depends on the area we are walking around on. So the answer is that we could end out that way." I said, and after I was done wiping my face off we continued walking toward the end of the forest.
The end of the forest was a lot closer than I thought that it would have been. When I saw Patomon give me a interested look, I knew that we were getting close to a village.
"I know I have been here before. It is coming up soon. But I figure that it will be very small in my memory. Since I think I went there when I was a small child." Patomon was telling me, and I was interested in what this village could have possibly been.
"Why were you here when you were young?" I questioned, and we kept on walking towards it. Until we found a place that looked like a baby center. With no real baby. So actually like a place that babies would play in. Like a day care village.
"What is with all the baby features in this place?" I asked and I was already starting to piece it all together.
"It is the village that we digimon get raised in when we are very young. Usually between first born to a couple years. That is why I don't remember it like at all. So I would be curious to check it out all over again." Patomon said to me, and I looked around and saw a baby crib. I walked on over to the crib and saw a digimon inside of it.
"Why is there no digimon in here to take care of the babies? What is the main reason that you don't remember this place?" The second question that I asked should have been very obvious but I was far more worried about the digimon in the crib without a babysitter.
I take that back, digimon in the cribs. There was more than one of them. It looked like when I checked it out that there was a couple hundred of the cribs. I was checking them all out like crazy until Patomon gave me a answer.
"You know that people don't remember what it was like when they were really young. You think that digimon are any different. You should try to remember something about your life on your own. But I do agree about the caretaker part. We should take care out the baby digimon until a babysitter comes back or comes here in the first place to take care of them." Patomon said, and I tried really hard to remember something from my babyhood.
It was a very vague memory from when I was a couple years old. I would say four or five. I was out in our back yard, playing around with some of my toys.
I was piling the blocks on top of each other trying to get all twenty up in a row. When I got about ten or eleven and was attempting to get another block on there, all of them fell down. A couple of them even fell on my feet and it actually sort of hurt.
A person was coming out of my house and ran directly ran up to me to see what the problem was. "T.K., calm down. I will be here for you until you stop crying." The man said, and I knew that he wasn't much older than me. About two or three years. I figured out pretty fast that this was my brother Matt. My memory ended there though.
When I was back in the present mind set of what was going on, I checked out Patomon. "Yes I do have one memory that I remember a little bit. Not really that well, but I remember that part of when my brother Matt came and told me that everything will be alright." I answered the question and we were going to talk more when we had a interruption that made me nearly scream for a moment.
I turned around to see what the noise was. It was a digimon that had a weird purple pattern on its back. "Those are the babies I am supposed to take care of until they are old enough to go out in the real world. I demand that you stop doing this right now." The digimon said, and I took a step or two back and put the baby I was currently holding down in the crib they were in.
"What kind of digimon is this?" I asked Patomon and my partner nodded at me.
"It's Eleckmon. One of the digimon that hardly do any sort of fighting as they are always taking care of these children digimon. I remember a sighting of it when I was young. So I do remember a very tiny amount of when I was a baby after all." Patomon replied as we sort of settled down the discussion of what we remember and don't remember when we were younger babies.
"I didn't think that you would return to this place. What is this human that is with you?" Eleckmon pointed their finger at Patomon, and I was glancing at the two back and fourth. "But hey that doesn't excuse you for doing what you have done. I still feel the same way and you must leave or else I will give in and fight you after all." I didn't want to have a fight, but I was starting to expect that this was the reality that I would do. Even though I dislike fighting from my parents divorce.
"Do you want to fight us for if we can stay here or not?" Patomon asked Eleckmon, and I was getting very uncomfortable.
"I would love to do that. I don't care if I took care of you when you were young or not. I will be able to beat you in this fight." Eleckmon said cocky, and the two digimon went right towards each other in a fight.
Both of them kept going back and fourth with each other like how brothers would rough house with each other when they are trying to settle a dispute.
My digivice was going back and fourth on glowing. I had no idea what the glowing meant until I connected some of the dots. The light showed up when we digivolve. This meant that Patomon was going back and fourth on the idea if they wanted to digivolve or not.
I looked back and still saw Eleckmon and Patomon fighting. They were bumping into the toy buildings and were almost going right into the cribs. I knew that both of them would regret it if they destroyed the cribs of the babies. I knew that I had to do something about it right then and there.
"Stop it! I have another idea. How about we play tug of war?" I told them and both of the digimon gave me a confused look.
"Why do you want to do that?" Both of the digimon asked at the exact same time almost. Like they were in one hundred percent agreement on at least this.
"It's simple. You guys play tug of war. It will all be fair. When one of them wins, we will then see if we leave or not. If Patomon wins, we stay. If Eleckmon wins, we leave. Can we accept that?" I gave them the idea, and both digimon were silent.
"I guess that we can do this. When should we start?" Eleckmon agreed to my terms and we decided to do it in ten minutes, so we would have enough time to get ready.
About those ten minutes later, Patomon and Eleckmon were tied up on two ends of a rope and I was in a slightly changed outfit. Such as my hat being a tad different from what I normally wear. This was supposed to show that I was judging them now.
"Remember that the first digimon that gets the other one to the other side is the winner." I told them and I held my hand up. "On three. One, two, three. Go!" I put my hand down and they started playing the tug of war.
At the start, Eleckmon was winning by a long shot. Soon after a minute or two, Patomon was slowly getting the upper hand. Either it was just warming up, or Eleckmon poured all their strength into the first bit hoping to get the game out of the way and win. But after a little bit of tugging and pulling, Patomon was able to pull Eleckmon's entire rope in the air and makes Eleckmon fly in the air a little bit. Once Eleckmon fell into one of the toy houses, they were still for about a minute or so.
When Eleckmon got up and started leading to us. They looked like they were in pain for a bit but soon they got a smile on their face. "I guess that you win. Maybe I will let you stay after all. Since that was the terms we came up with. I will trust you now, just don't make me feel like I made the wrong choice by letting you stay the night." Eleckmon told us, and I had something to ask it.
"Eleckmon, do you know about Devimon?" I asked, and Eleckmon nodded very slowly. Like they were regretting the answer that they were about to make.
"Yes I remember them before. They wanted to take over the digital world, but failed after deciding that they were just going to wait for a little bit. I heard that they have come back. I know that you don't like to fight, but you will have to do it to get out of this one. Or the others will have to fight Devimon for you. But fighting is the only way that they will be defeated." Eleckmon replied, and I looked down. I hated to admit it, but I think that they were correct.
"Yeah perhaps you are right. Can you let us stay the night though?" I asked them, and Eleckmon nodded. We looked up at the sunset and just didn't do anything but watch it for several minutes.
I had another flashback about my friend Davis and I hanging out. It was a couple summers ago, on his twelfth birthday. He was letting me stay over for the entire weekend sort of thing.
I came up to his house and knocked on his door. He answered it and smiled when he saw that I was able to come on over. "Come on in T.K. I would like you to see one of my cousins. Her name is Molly. So sweet for her age of only eight. You would find her amazing." Davis told T.K. whole he was showing his friend into the house. They were both in his room for about ten minutes before there was another knock on the door.
The two walked on over to see who it was that knocked. Davis opened the door and I saw a young boy. Who looked eight or nine. I gave Davis a odd look wondering what he would possibly be doing here.
"This is one of my best friends T.K." Davis started towards me. He put his hand out to the kid. "His name is Cody. He's also about eight like my cousin Molly. He's a couple months older than her though." Davis finished while the kid named Cody walked on into the house. We were now waiting for his cousin molly to show up before we could do anything for the party.
The three of us were making up some random stories. Cody himself was alright to me. I mean he didn't impress me so much, but he was alright.
I showed them a game called 'Yearbook Dungeons and Dragons.' I explained the entire concept to them. It's like the game Dungeons and Dragons but the yearbook part comes in where your character is a person in the yearbook. You play like them. Like you're trying to impersonate them. It is actually really fun when you try it out. I would suggest it honestly.
When we picked out who were going to use for our game the door got knocked on again. Davis got up right away and opened it. I saw a young girl who looked about eight. She also looked a little bit like Davis.
"Hey Molly. Thanks for coming on over. I have a couple of my friends over right now." Davis introduced her to us. I was looking at her, and I felt happy looking at her.
What a beauty? I thought to myself when I saw her, and I hoped Davis wouldn't judge me if I told her that I thought so. He would probably be a tiny bit concerned because of our four to five age difference.
"My friend T.K. was showing us this game. We could explain it to you." Davis told her and all three of us explained the entire concept of the game to her. She seemed to actually be interested in the idea.
Us playing the game lasted a couple hours, and I found myself wanting to throw it on a few moments because I was too busy in my mind wanting to make Molly happy.
"Hey Davis, how about we go out for a moment?" Cody asked Davis, and Davis agreed to the idea as they walked towards the house entrance.
"We will be back in about forty five minutes. We are just getting drinks and food for the game. T.K. make sure Molly is alright." Davis told us as he and Cody left the house. I looked at Molly, getting a smile on my face. I really liked looking at her. She really was a great sight.
"Hey Molly, how do you and Davis get along?" I asked Molly, and she seemed to be at a loss for a second.
"We are going well. How about you and him?" Molly replied, and I nodded.
"Davis and I are also going well." I said and we kept talking. I almost touched her at one moment. Like on the leg when we saw the door starting to open. It was Cody and Davis coming back in.
"We can now get back in the game. Now that we have some food and drinks to go along with it." Cody said as he sat next to me on the left and Davis sat next to me on the right. We went right back into the game. Everything else went well after that. The next couple days was nice and that is the end of my flashback was over. I was taken back to the sunset and general mindset of the present.
A few minutes later, we heard a noise from the background. I had no idea what it was but I would find out a few minutes later that it was one of the shadows watching us. Waiting to strike at us until we were truly one hundred percent distracted.
When it was starting to get dark and both of us were starting to get tired, that was when the shadow started making a move on us. They were trying to grab Eleckmon, and when they noticed that Eleckmon wasn't fully distracted I had a chance to see what the shadow was doing here.
Instead of trying to fight us or anything, they just stood there. Deciding that they were going to go away. I knew that I had to do something about it. As much as I hated fighting, I knew this was important.
I didn't even try to take Patomon with me. I just starting running after it until the shadow was getting far away from the village. Going all the way towards a cave entrance and the shadow flew through the door.
I was about to go open the door when I heard a familiar voice calling towards me. But one I only heard once or twice though.
I turned around to see what it was. It was Ignitemon that I met near the time when Mimi had Palmon digivolve to Togemon. I knew that they were chasing the shadows around down as well. But I never figured that I was going to see it again at least until the battle with Devimon.
"Hello what are you doing in front of that cave?" Ignitemon asked me. I couldn't really tell the tone of its voice. It seemed either worried or just angry.
"I saw one of the shadows coming to here. This might be one of the only chances I have to defeat it." I answered and Ignitemon sat down near me. Taking a stick out and drawing on the ground with it. Like they were attempting to make a picture out of it.
"I knew of these shadows long before you even came to the digital world. You might be wondering why. It's because I served them at one point. It was for a few years when they first came along. I served them until I knew what their true intentions I did I left them as soon as I could and they have been interested to see what I plan on doing since then. But they don't know that I intend on helping you guys defeat them." Ignitemon gave me a little bit of back story to their past. They got back up once again and put their hand on my shoulder.
"I can't battle the shadow for you. I feel that this is one of those battles that you should do on your own. But I will help you. Here take these." Ignitemon pulled out two knifes from their inventory. "You can use these to fight the shadow. I don't know how much it will help you but I feel better about putting you in there alone now. Now go and face it. I hope that you win." Ignitemon left me alone when they finished saying that. I was alone now. I turned around to go inside the cave and opened the door.
Once inside I saw that it was pretty dark inside. Which I found to be a annoyance honestly. There was a flashback that I had yet again with Davis and I.
It was during the sixth grade, and Davis was running up to me real excited. I turned around to see what the big deal was when I noticed the notice in his hands.
"Check this out." Davis said and I looked at it after he handed the notice to me. It was for a school dance and everybody in the seventh grade and beyond was allowed.
"Yeah I get it. But we're not old enough to go to it. So why are you making such a big deal about it?" I asked and Davis shook his head with a smile on his face. I knew that he was planning something as soon as I saw that smile on his face.
"No I found a way my friend. Do you want to hear it? Okay thanks for saying yes. I found out that if we go in a suit that the people will be more convinced that we are old enough. They don't really examine who walks through the registration room. We can just go in if we are looking good enough. We can dance with the girls there and brag about it for a couple days afterwards." Davis said to me, and I thought about it for a moment.
"I will have to think to think about it for a moment. More like until a bit before the dance. I will give you my answer sometime later. Okay." I answered and went on over to my next class. I was wondering what Davis would want to do at the school dance. Is he honestly thinking that somebody would go to sleep with him? If so then that is really odd.
Quite a bit of time passed by before I decided. I walked on over to Davis after I did so and told him. "Sure I will do it. The problem is how are we going to find a suit that will be fit enough for me?" I told Davis and he thought about it, and I was getting a little concerned before he got a answer in his mind.
"I will show you it soon." Davis told me and that was the end of the school day. A day or two later the day of the dance was here. Davis came to my door and knocked on it multiple times. I answered it and saw that he had a suit in his hand. I assumed that it was for me since I mentioned the problem earlier.
"Hey T.K., I even got your suit ready." Davis said before I could even ask him why he was here so early. He went right in and handed the suit to me. "Why don't go to the bathroom and change into those clothes?" Davis asked, and I knew that he wouldn't have left me alone until I did it.
I went to the bathroom and changed into the suit. I liked the fact that the dress shoes he handed me were brown and not black. The suit almost fit me just fine actually. The only problem was that the arm part went a little past my wrist instead of right at it. As well as the fact the pants were a little large on me. But they stopped at the shoes, so that problem wasn't too bad.
I came out of the bathroom and showed Davis the outfit on me. He nodded in approval, and put the tie on me. "My mom is coming here just soon enough. I told her about the dance and she agreed to take us over there. I didn't tell her though that we're too young to go."
Just with that, a car pulled up that wasn't my mothers. Which was nice. Because if it was, she would have been wondering why I was suited up like this. I had never met Davis's mom before, which was why I was really confused when I saw that they looked nothing like him.
His mother was completely white, while Davis was a much darker skinned. He wasn't black, but pretty decently tan and I wondered if he looked more like his dad. "Hello, are you Davis's friend T.K.?" She asked me and I nodded. "Good, I went to the right house. Let's go to the school now."
Davis's mother drove us all the way to the school the dance was taking place in. At the registration area, some people looked at us. However nobody did anything about it. They just let Davis and I in the room.
The dance was wild would be some of the only words that I could use to describe it. But that didn't bother me though. A few minutes in, I saw this one girl walk up to me. "Hey want to dance?" She asked, and I agreed.
She led me to the dance floor and Davis was giving me a thumbs up. We danced together really casual until she wisphered that we should go and do the crazy dance. I had to idea what it was so she was teaching how to do it, and I was going along with it. I would like to say I was doing a good job, but that would be a lie.
It turned out she was the only person I danced with the entire time. At the end of the dance, I came back to Davis. He looked sad for some reason.
"Davis, what is wrong?" I asked, and Davis glanced at me. I knew that something must have been bothering him from the looks on his face.
"The girl I would have wanted to be at the dance wasn't here. What should I have expected? She was also too young for this. The dance is over, so let's just go home." Davis replied and we left the school after we checked that the time was almost eleven at night. The flashback ended there.
I was once again forced to go back into the actual mindset of things when I was walking in the cave that the shadow was in for a while. I was going down a insane staircase. By insane I would mean that the staircase was over a hundred steps. That is almost as long as some columns. I had no light to go with because I had nothing to use to bring some light. I only had my digivice and those two knives that Ignitemon gave me.
"You may think that the other digidestined care for you, but you have no idea just how wrong you are. None of them care for you. You are the laughing stock. Nobody cares because you haven't had you weak partner digivolve and therefore you are useless. Give it up T.K., you are not wanted by the others. Join us and Daemon and we will bring down Devimon and rule the digital world." The shadow was making fun of T.K., but he was doing his best not to get too angry with the insults. But T.K. was very curious who this Daemon creature was. Since he had never heard of it, maybe he would let the shadow talk a little longer.
"Who is Daemon? I don't think I heard of them before." I said, and I sounded interested mainly because I actually sort of was interested.
"Daemon is a servant of Devimon who only wants Devimon dead so he can take over File Island and we can be a part of that domination. You know you want some domination." The shadow was still trying to make T.K. be convinced that he would want to fight against the group and be with the shadows.
"You are going to have to try harder than that to convince me." I told the shadow, and I was saddened. Because they had hardly talked about what Daemon really was.
The shadow didn't talk to me anymore, which was alright enough for me. I kept on walking for a while until I thought I saw it in front of me. The shadow turned in my direction, but bent their neck down. "Want to fight?" The shadow asked and they flew right at me.
I sliced one of the knives in the air to at least get a little bit at the shadow. They didn't seem to hurt about it, but I saw that it was a little phased from it. Which I would consider a point towards me.
The shadow flew at through me, and I fell on the ground and my body hit the ground harder. "That really hurt." I mumbled under my breath and got back up.
When the shadow was going at me again I used the knife again and the attack that time seemed to phase it a little bit. More than the last time. Maybe the more I attack it the more it would get hurt. Despite how much I really go at it. It was the best I could shot for.
I feel like the shadow was getting onto my idea since they took of the two knives and destroyed it. I had no idea how that could happen, but I only had one knife left to fight with.
I just stabbed the knife right through the body of the shadow to make it feel more in pain and then I pulled it out and kept pulling in and out of the body of the shadow multiple times.
The shadow was defeated after that but there was one more thing that it was going to tell me. "There is something else that you must see. It will change your idea on this whole thing. You won't be worried about Devimon or us, but rather something in a different area of this world all together. Never mind, a different world altogether," The shadow told me and it was gone.
I turned around to see a small opening leading somewhere else. I felt that perhaps I should at least check it out. To maybe see what the shadow was talking about. I walked on through the light, which is a huge misleader considering the place that I was going to go into.
The place that I was now in was totally dark and depressing. I had no idea where I was, but this was worse than what I dealt with before. I had hardly been in here and I knew that whatever lead this place would make me beg for Devimon to come and take me away by comparison.
"Need you. I need you." I heard a voice telling me, and I turned around to see what had said that to me. It was a digimon that had a white chest and had a black black. It looked like a digimon that would go swim in the water.
"What is this?" I asked, and saw the digimon, or what looked like seven or eight of the same type of digimon. The digimon looked sad when I asked that question.
"We are called Scubamon. We are forced to do its work and we are never rewarded. This digimon is one of the most heartless creatures that you will ever meet. They are the ruler of this ocean, this world. The dark world." Scubamon told me, and I saw it pointing at the water. Which was just grey and sad. I walked close to it.
"Are you wanting me to help you?" I asked them, and they shook their head.
"We are not asking, we are begging. You are the first in many years to show up here. Please at least understand what it is." Scubamon replied, and I looked back at the water again. I saw a red eye flash in the water for a second and went back to darkness afterwards.
"Am I the only one who saw that eye in the water?" I asked the Scubamon. I felt that this eye had something to do with what this digimon is.
"That is Dragomon. They are the king of the dark world. They kill us to get more power if we don't help them enough or are hungry. We will feel grateful for you if you help us destroy Dragomon." The Scubamon led me away from the water and took us quite a few feet from the place so we could be a little more safe.
"If I leave, can I be able to come back here again?" I asked Scubamon and none of them answered for a bit.
"If you can, please help out the best you can. Dragomon is coming soon. We can't let them know what you have done to talk to you. Look in front of you for a moment." Scubamon said and I turned around. I saw the start of a digimon coming out of the water. It was real slow going but I knew that this was Dragomon coming out of the water.
"Okay I have to head out right now. I will return and help out as best as I can." I said and walked through the same entrance that I had went in the first time.
Back at the cave I walked on until I reached the entrance again and walked through and found Ignitemon once again. "Did you win?" They asked, and they even picked up on how pointless the question was. Then I told Ignitemon what had happened after the battle with the shadow.
"The dark world is a much darker form of the digital world. Dragomon is even more powerful than Devimon, and if you think that Devimon is bad, then you truly have no idea what is coming your way." Ignitemon told me, and took a piece of paper out and wrote something on it. They handed me the paper.
Bearmon Residence, located at The Priory of Server
"What is the purpose of this paper address?" I asked Ignitemon, and they seemed a little surprised that I didn't understand.
"I thought you would have picked up on what it meant. It's the address on a digimon that knows about the dark world. They can help you get the purpose of how you can save them from Dragomon. You should probably head on back to Patomon and Eleckmon once again. They are most likely wondering where you are now. I think it is up to you to at least tell them the result of the shadow." Ignitemon left me soon after they said that and I was perhaps getting a little annoyed by all the times they showed up just to leave a couple seconds later.
Right before I saw Patomon and Eleckmon again, I had one final flashback about my and Davis's friendship from the past.
At the flashback, I saw us when we were at the last day of the sixth grade. We were walking on down the hallway, and Davis seemed ever happier than me. "First time I went through sixth grade." He said, and I didn't quite get it. I mean, this would obviously be his first time through it since he had just finished it. Didn't seem too hard.
"Well I will be going to summer camp this summer and that will mean that I won't be seeing you for a few months. Are you cool with that?" I told Davis and Davis looked like he was in a totally different area. I was wondering what was going on. "Davis?"
"I am fine with that. A couple months isn't too much of a fraction of what our lifespans here. Go ahead and have a good time. I will find a way to entertain myself for those months." Davis answered and I sighed in relief.
"I think we can agree either way that it is nice to have a few months off from school." I said to Davis, as I saw Matt pulling up his car. I forgot for a moment that he was now old enough to drive. I stepped inside the car an waved bye at Davis as we drove away.
The flashback ended as I went back to Patomon and Eleckmon. Both looking at me oddly. "So you made it." Eleckmon seemed so proud of the fact. It was very late in the night, and all three of us were just beyond dirt tired. I felt like I could fall down right there. I had put myself in my sleeping bag and the digimon had set up and I still hadn't noticed what was looking at us from above us.
Leomon was checking us out. They were ready to attack us. Just as Devimon ordered, and my being asleep would have been a great chance to kill us. Since I couldn't do anything about it. But they were going to have to wait for the digimon to sleep as well.
----
Chapter 15: The Legend of the Digidestined
Narrative Resumed by Joe
After T.K. had passed his test, faced that shadow and came into that visit in the dark world (all of which I only learnt of much after the defeat of Devimon), all of us had passed the test and this meant something much larger. That we were ready to face our enemy Devimon. The digimon that forced us all to do our best to return, gave us all in some ways a common goal, and lastly was our best way back to our home.
I wondered what Sora thought of the situation. "Hey Sora, how do you feel about fighting Devimon now?" I asked her, and Sora was looking down at the water she was above. Since she was riding with Birdramon and I was riding with Ikkakumon.
"Yeah, it will be nice to return home. That is what I look forward to the most here." Sora told me, and I agreed with that statement. As much as I didn't like being home and was worried to what my fathers reaction would be, I would take my father any day over Devimon. I would go as far as to say that Devimon makes my father look like a paradise.
I felt my seasickness coming onto me now though. That was a problem I usually faced when I was on the water. In fact, I think I actually lasted longer than I normally did before I got sea sick on normal instances.
It was getting rather late at night and I felt that if this was a normal day in normal life, most of us would have been asleep for the night. Kind of shows all of our changes in mindset. We were almost all the way back to the center of the island.
The sun was down fully when we had reached Devimon's part of the island. Pretty soon after we came to the part of the island, we found most of the other group members. Aside from T.K. and his digimon partner, who were still sort of out of sight at the moment. Made me wonder just how much we would have to go to find it.
Matt was actually mentioning that really early when we were reunited. "We should find T.K. and Patomon. Everybody else besides him are together. So either we leave right now or we wait until the morning before leaving again." Were the words that Matt told us, and I knew that it was going to be a voting moment.
Everybody with the exceptions of Mimi and Tai raised their hands that we do it right now. Everybody else was on a general agreement that we needed to do it right then. I had something sort of playing in the back of my head. Something I wanted to suggest to Tai, our secret and true leader. He nor nobody else may have realized it, but Tai was our true leader.
"While it would be nice to take a sleep I understand it is a general agreement we should go out now." Matt said and nobody was up to argue who was be in front on this walk. He was though. All our digimon directly next to us and I was worried about everything that is in front of us, finding T.K. was a minor detail in comparison. As horrible as it may sound.
Matt's spirit made it up for me though. So I was going to deal with it, but nobody was really talking just now.
I would say that after walking on for about twenty to forty minutes we did find T.K.'s digimon partner, Patomon in a village that looked like a place for baby toys. Late at night, it seemed to scare me a little bit. It would fit in given what we were just about to deal with.
When we were within ten feet from T.K., I heard a small crack. I assumed that it was a tree branch being stepped on and breaking. I looked up and saw a sword flying right at us.
Matt picked T.K. right up and we started running right in time for Leomon to fall down and picked up their sword. "Devimon will respect me for killing you all. Who should I start with?" Leomon said and then seemed to pause for a second. Like they were listening to a voice. Which seemed odd since we weren't speaking and nobody else was.
"I will pick you." Leomon pointed at T.K., who was just now waking up and getting out of Matt's grip. T.K. put his hand in his pocket, like he was going for his digivice. But he was checking to make sure that the paper of the Bearmon address was still in his pocket.
Tai looked at all of us while Leomon was coming at us. "We need to digivolve now. If we do so then Leomon will be defeated faster and we will then advance off to fight Devimon then." Tai told us and we took out our digivices and our digimon knew what their job was.
"Agumon digivolve to... GREYMON!" Agumon yelled.
"Gabumon digivolve to... GARURUMON!" Gabumon yelled.
"Birdramon digivolve to... BIRDRAMON!" Biyomon yelled.
"Tentomon digivolve to... KABUTERIMON!" Tentomon yelled.
"Palmon digivovle to... TOGEMON!" Palmon yelled.
"Gomamon digivolve to... IKKAKUMON!" Gomamon yelled.
With all those digivolutions out of the way, all six of them started advancing towards Leomon. Greymon shooting some fire at them, Garurumon breathing some icy fire right after. Birdramon breathing their own fire at Leomon. Kabuterimon shooting some electricity at the foe, Togemon shooting their needles at it, and Ikkaumon firing a torpedo at our opponent.
It seemed that all added up, it might have worked. But when all the attacks faded away Leomon seemed to be on the ground trying to get back up. Almost defeated, but still ready to give a little bit of fighting back left.
That was until more black gears started flying right at Leomon and going inside it. Leomon started growing in size by a large amount until the digimon was black them self and some of their veins were almost showing up for us to see.
When Leomon was almost ten feet long, we started attacking it right again. All of us shooting at it a second time and this time doing twice as much damage. When Leomon was getting down and almost giving up, we attacked it once more.
Soon as we stopped attacking, Leomon went back to their normal size and started panting. Like six or seven black gears came out of them and all of them broke. "What happened? What was I doing?" I feel bad right now. My head hurts." Leomon was saying and looked at us. Not exactly sure what to think of what they were seeing. "I was attacking you was I? If I was, sorry. I am just confused." The digimon was saying and Matt had a idea.
"Why is Devimon so focused on killing us right now?" Matt asked it, and Leomon seemed to be confused for a second and then got it.
"Yes, I know why. There is a legend about certain humans who will save us all." Leomon said and they must have picked up that we were confused because of the fact that they started explaining more in detail.
"There is a legend that humans will come to this island and save it from great evil. A great evil that will try to take over this island and only really care about what can help them get this goal fulfilled?" Leomon started explaining, and looked at us to see if we were following as of yet. We were, so we allowed them to keep explaining.
"It is untrue if this legend is true or where it was made. But given what our situation is, our digimon on this place are just willing to accept anything that is told. Any supposed idea or story line gives us hope for being freed b Devimon. Sounds like something that may have been true to humans at one point in their life." Leomon said and I sort of have a question or two in my head.
"I wonder a couple things. First off, what is the rule for the humans and what we have to do so we could save the world? Secondly, do you believe in this story line?" I asked Leomon, and there was a pause for a moment before Leomon continued.
"I do believe in these legends, mostly this one. Because this legend is a sign of true hope that may expand beyond Devimon and is more of a sign than most other things that could be handed our way. To your first question, the legend is based on the idea that the humans need a digimon partner with them. Which you already have, every single one of you. Another thing you need is that you people need to have your digimon digivolve into something stronger here. A requirement that all of you besides the young one have met." Leomon told what I assumed was the end of the legend story. Leomon then looked at the top of the mountain confused.
"I wish I could help you seven on the fight against Devimon here, but I cannot. I told you enough. I believe you are the digidestined. But mostly, I think you can be able to defeat Devimon all on your own. So I will head out now. I suggest that you rest for the rest of the night and then face them in the morning. That way you have some time to get ready." Leomon said to all of us and headed away from us.
We took Leomon's idea of resting for the night. Mainly because we were all dirt tired and hardly had any rest during this whole time that we were island split. Everybody had set up their camp and most of us were just plain asleep within a couple minutes. I was asleep last for really no reason but when I did I think I might have gotten like maybe fifteen minutes before I was forced awake.
"Joe wake up, Ogremon is attacking us. They are taking Tai!" I heard one of them yelling and I had no idea which one was yelling that. This detail was a little useless by comparison to the part that Tai was being taken by Ogremon. I forced myself awake and was looking at Ogremon running out with them holding Tai.
"This is crazy and mostly stupid but I will go out and save him. Don't do anything here and just guard this area in case a servant of Devimon comes back and attacks again." I told the others my idea and looked at Gomamon. They had digivolved to Ikkakumon and I climbed on their back.
"Let's go Joe." Ikkakumon said and we started riding off in a pace I didn't feel was possible because of how slow they usually went.
It was still not fast enough for us to be in sight of Ogremon while we were going up. It did get too far ahead of us. We were going up the mountain at increasingly fast pace. "We can't stop until we get Tai from Devimon. I wonder what Devimon would even want to do with him. He didn't go for any of the others, just him." I said more really to myself than to Ikkakumon, but the message was a little directed at them.
"It really doth not matter why he did it as long as he save him Joe. We need to be much more focused on that." Ikkakumon was answering my question, and I was thinking that maybe the digimon was right.
"Yeah perhaps you're right. I just still want to know why though." I said and then I looked at the castle. It was sort of brown and looked like a couple stories high.
"I hope that we doff not really need to fight Devimon up there and we just go inside and out really fast. Or if we really doff hath to fight, then perhaps we can only need to fight a servant or two." Ikkakumon was telling me their hope, and I wasn't really even thinking about that.
The area seemed pitch black and was only lightened by lights in Devimon's castle by the time we got up to the top of the mountain. Ikkakumon and I ran right through the door without too much thought on it to save Tai. It was a dumb idea and honestly ended more terribly than good.
Once we were in the front hall, I was taking some time to examine the hall that Devimon had. As much as I didn't understand, I wouldn't say hated it, I was sort of impressed with all the paintings. It was like they were all telling a legend.
"Is this like a painting reenactment of the worlds events?" I asked Ikkakumon, but wasn't expecting them to know the answer to this question. It would have been a little odd if they did know the answer to this.
I was checking it out so much that I almost forgot all about Devimon being there and possibly only just not attacking so we could have some time to look at this.
One of the paintings was that I saw was a battle with five humans morphing into digimon and fighting something that looked like a angel like devil. It was one of the most well painted out of the bunch. One of the human digimon was looking like a blue beetle, one was a nice looking female digimon that had some purple hair. I also noticed that the digimon were turning into one big one.
"I wonder how long it took to paint this." I said and then Ikkakumon looked scared for some reason when I turned my back around.
"I think we just found Tai." Ikkakumon told me, and I saw Tai who looked beat up. I ran up to him and saw a bunch of marks. They were obviously whipping marks on his back, and some that even looked like scratches.
"What happened here?" I asked Tai and then I heard a voice that ruined all chance that Tai would be giving me this answer.
"I was trying to get some info on your group from him, but that was not going as expected. He gave more of a fight than I even gave him credit for. He didn't even show any signs of obvious pain. I will admit that I am impressed." Devimon said and held their hands out to us. "But now that this is over, how about a little fun time. You will fight two of my servants and we will see how that turns out. Ogremon will be going back to your camp. So you have a couple choices. Fight or risk your friends getting horribly hurt."
There was a digimon that ran right at us. "Meet my other servant Fangmon. I would love to see how you defeat this." Devimon said, and then Agumon digivolved for Tai so he wouldn't have to make the command.
"Blast Coffin!" Fangmon yelled and ran right into Greymon. Making Greymon fall on down. I looked at Ikkakumon.
"Harpoon Torpedo!" Ikkaukumon yelled and hit Fangmon as a distraction, and that was enough for Greymon to get up and fight with us.
"Nova Blast!" Greymon yelled and also hit Fangmon. After about two or three seconds, Fangmon got right back up and ran at us.
"Snipe Steal!" Fangmon also yelled and hit both of the digimon so they would fall on down hurt. Devimon was laughing at this battle. For once it was us that were down. Fangmon was about to attack Ikkakumon and Greymon when there was a clap.
I looked behind a saw Daemon coming down the hallway. It was that one digimon that worked with Devimon, but also said that they didn't want to. "What a nice performance from these humans. Let us call this a end battle. I am more curious about how Ogremon was doing attacking the other kids. Daemon was saying, and I saw them winking at me. For reasons I didn't quite get.
I then assumed that Daemon was either buying Ogremon time to attack them or they were giving Devimon more of a reason to get us out of here
"Devimon, I am tired of your doings. I will not be serving you anymore." Daemon said and then got their fists ready for a attack. "Slash Nail!" Daemon yelled and then slashed at Devimon with their left hand. Devimon actually seemed hurt, but later I realized that Daemon was going easy on Devimon.
"How dare you turn sides on me. I let you stay here for a long time. You then turn on me and then attack at me." Devimon was getting angrier with each sentence that they were saying. "Death Hand!" Devimon yelled and then pushed Ikkakumon, Greymon, Daemon, Tai and I out of the castle. We were starting to fly in the air a little bit.
Daemon grabbed a hold of us so we wouldn't hit the ground as hard when we landed. But then I felt that something was already grabbing a hold of us. Something totally different from Daemon.
I looked up and saw Birdramon and Sora carrying us to where I assume was all the way back to the camp site. I wonder how she felt abut Daemon being here with us. Then I thought of something much more important. What about the attack that Devimon was sending Ogremon to do? I feel like this was the main reason Sora came to us. That the attack was already a thing.
"We need you right now. There is a major problem coming up." Sora was saying to Tai and I, and she took a second to look down at us. "Wow Tai, you look rough. Wait, what is Daemon doing here right now?"
"They tried to help us from Devimon. They are alright. We should be more worried about something else. Devimon is sending Ogremon to attack you guys." I told Sora, and she looked at me. From her face, I knew that this attack already happened.
We landed a few minutes later right on our campsite. Once we landed, we saw Ogremon look at us by turning around. They paused for a second and then turned around. Continuing their attack, and hit Mmi with their club. She fell down, and I nearly wanted to scream. How could they hurt Mimi? I was almost mentally crying. Then Ogremon threw Matt and Izzy to the side. The only one they didn't bother with was T.K., for some reason. I was sort of confused why.
When all that was done, Ogremon started leaving. Daemon was setting a fire ball on their hand, but I saw the fireball taming down. As if they were not wanting to show their power. But I knew that this was only going to be one of the few times that they were going to hold back.
When Ogremon was done, I ran right to Mimi and grabbed her. "Don't worry Mimi, it will all be alright." I said to her and put her face on mine. "If you can't do it, I won't force you to fight Devimon."
Everybody was looking at Daemon, wondering how they were. "I was a digimon forced to work with Devimon. They are my own child, and I am ashamed to see where they are. I am not exactly on your side, but I am not on Devimon's either. While I can't help or harm you right now, I will be heading to the capital city so they can discuss the problems of the digital world. A place called Metal City." Daemon was a couple feet away from not being see able when T.K. ran up to Daemon.
He pulled something out of his pocket and showed it to Daemon. They seemed to be talking for a while and then T.K. nodded like he seemed to get it. The only things I heard were: Dark world, you should leave, I will, and thank you. I wasn't sure which ones were saying which. T.K. afterwards came back to us and then we all looked at him odd.
"Nothing important. I was just wondering their perspective on a important matter that I had to consider for the last few hours." T.K. told us, and we were silent for a moment. We almost forgot about Mimi being injured until she started panting in pain. I looked down at her and had a tear in my eyes.
"Please don't go. I don't want to tell you." I was saying to her and then Mimi put her finger on my mouth. Cutting my message short. I was going to confess to her that I had a crush on her. In front of everybody. But what she was saying was far more important.
"I have a little bit of my back story to tell you. I have been debating to myself for a long time, almost since we went into the digital world, about if I should tell you guys or not. But I will do it now. In worry that I won't able to go on much longer." Mimi had a tear in her left eye and took several pants before she continued.
"I had a babysitter several years ago. I was once from America, and I had a nice life there. My babysitter was a man named Anthony. He was fourteen years older than myself. He was so nice and I remember him so well. When I was between the ages of three to ten, my parents hired him to take care of me. We had a good relationship. It was almost like he was becoming a part o our family, and went to college for the first time when he was twenty. I remember those ages exactly. When he was off to college, my parents let him stay at our house for the summers and during breaks. Those were several nice months of the year, going all through his college experience." Mimi kept telling the story and I saw her speaking was hurting her. I tried to gt her to stop, but she just wouldn't. She was too far into the story for anybody to get her to stop.
"What happened to him?" T.K. asked Mimi, and she was worried to tell us, but she knew that she might of had to anyways.
"That is why I couldn't hang out with him anymore. When I was ten, he wanted to show me to the college that he went to. I was super excited about it and I was even allowed to sit on the passenger seat. I brought my stuff animal. A teddy bear, it was my favorite." Mimi had to pause for a moment again before she continued telling the story.
"During the car ride we were talking and having so much fun. He was telling me about all the great traits of the college that he was about to show me to. But when we were at the red light, I dropped the teddy bear stuffed animal. It was closer to him and he bent down and picked it up to give it back to me sooner. He by mistake drove right into the street when the light was on red. The other cars just drove right into it, causing a terrible accident. Police were there within five minutes and I was trying to get Anthony to get my attention for that whole amount. The police officer grabbed me out before I could resist. I was surprised that I barely got hurt by it. But I heard that Anthony was killed on impact." Mimi told us the actual news, and then she paused as if she was trying to remember the last detail.
"Yes that was it. I took the teddy bear and was angry when I was holding it. A week later there was a funeral, and I put the teddy bear on the grave. I could just not look at it anymore, it was just too hard for me. My parents didn't blame me but at the same moment, they didn't blame Anthony. Makes me feel like it was both our faults. But they brought me over to Japan so people wouldn't talk to me about the moment anymore. But first they let me finish the school year that I was in." Mimi seemed to have finished the story.
"If I ever died, I could always be there for him in return. Almost makes up for it. Anthony, you just had to go so soon." Mimi said that last little bit, and then looked at me.
"Wow, that is actually really sad." I told her, and Mimi started to almost close her eyes.
"I need to sleep." Mimi wisphered, and closed her eyes. I out my head on her chest, where the heart was. It was still pumping. Which was the best part of this whole story. That she, one of the most beautiful people I seen in a long time, was still very much alive.
I put my lips on her forehead, and kissed it while her eyes were closed. I let her body drop to the ground really calmly. I got up and looked at the others. All of them were sort of shocked. I walked on up to Tai, and told him what I thought.
"Tai, I have decided. I want you to be our leader. Before you ask, I thought about this a little bit, and I know that I want this to be the case. You seem like the one that would be the most perfect for the role, and I know that I can't do it. So please, I believe you. Please be the leader of our group, or at the very least try it out a little bit." I told Tai, and I cold actually see Tai debating what I said in his mind.
"I guess that trying it at the very least would be alright." Tai replied, and then I looked up at the mountain. "I know that we are really dragged down and I don't know if this is a good idea or not, but I think it is time to fight Devimon. Let's get ready, because I am pumped to do it now and I just want Devimon down." Tai said, and I was loving the idea. I could tell that everybody else was agreeing with the idea because all of them were looking at their digimon.
"Let's do it." Most of the group said to their digimon partners and all of them digivolved to their champion forms. Togemon grabbed Mimi, and did their best not to wake her up. Tai got on Greymon's shoulder, Sora put her hand on Birdramon's right foot, Matt and Izzy got on Garurumon and Kabuterimon's backs respectively, I did the same for Ikkakumon. To spare T.K. the problem, I let him and his digimon on Ikkakumon's back with me. With everybody ready and on their partner in some way, we all started heading up the mountain that I went up to save Tai.
When most of the others were ahead of us, T.K. took this as his chance to talk to me about what happened on his island test.
"Joe, what if I had a chance to do something else like far beyond this? What I mean is that I saw these digimon that looked like they were in pain. It was in this dark area that made me seem very sad. But the thing that makes me want to save them is because I feel like I have a chance to to save them. I even got this paper from Ignitemon that gave me a address that could help me do just this. Save those Scubamon if you wanted to know what they are calles. Yes, I know that Patomon hasn't digivolved yet, but maybe that is a part of my big trial that I have to face." T.K. was telling me, and I even looked at him odd. I didn't completely get it, but I knew the concept. He was wanting to find a way to be useful, and this was one of the best chances that he had.
"What are you going to do though? Like after we fight Devimon?" I asked T.K. and I felt I already knew his answer. That was why I instantly regretted asking him it.
"I know you might not like this answer, but I am going after our fight with Devimon. I will try and save these Scubamon from the master of the dark world and meet that Bearmon on their address." T.K. answered, and then I had a couple more thoughts.
"Do you even have a slight idea of what the master of this dark world is like?" I asked T.K., and then he nodded a little bit.
"I heard from the Scubamon that this master of the dark world is actually possibly even more powerful than Devimon themself. You might be wondering where my first stop is. I think it is the place that Daemon is going to, Metal City. The reason I want to go there is because I can report it to some really powerful digimon and maybe they can help do something about it." T.K. was saying, and he looked a little worried.
"Do you even have any hopes to the fight with Devimon coming up soon?" I asked, and there was no response from T.K. I knew that he wouldn't answer. But then again, why would I expect him to answer me.
"Can't be any worse than some of the stuff that we had to deal with in our past." T.K. muttered under his breath. I thought about it deep down, and realized that T.K. was right. This wasn't the worse than that we ever had to deal with.
"I just hope we don't screw up and possibly ruin the only chance that the digimon of this island have of being freed here." I then pictured something that was sort of bad. "What if we aren't the digidestined that Leomon had hoped we weren't?"
There wasn't a answer from T.K., but there was something else he said. "I feel that I haven't been a good enough member of this group. I feel useless by comparison to the others here. All because my partner hasn't digivolved yet, and that people would only judge the amount of times that we help out in our battles."
That last bit was the part that sort of hit me home. "I really don't think it is how much we help in these stupid battles that should define us. I feel like you are going to be a very good person in the future. Much better than I ever will be. I take that back. I know this is going to be true." I said and T.K. seemed really happy that I said this, since I saw him give me a large smile.
"Do you really mean it?' He asked me, and I nodded to him. Because I did.
"I do mean this T.K. Don't ever let what anybody tell you do anything about it." I replied and then he looked at me real glad.
"Alright. Thanks for telling that to me. It actually does make me feel a lot better." T.K. said and I looked to my front. We were a few feet away from the mountain that Devimon was at. The battle was going to happen in only about a minute or two.
We landed on the mountain and then Devimon was already flying down to fight us. "This is the moment that I have been looking forward to for such a long time You don't know how much I love this moment." Devimon threw their hand out and made all of our digimon take a few steps back to avoid getting hit.
Tai was now ready to command us to fight Devimon. "Everybody fire right at Devimon's chest!" Tai told us, and I think that this was his worst choice. Because he announced what he wanted us to do, Devimon had enough time to deflect most of the blows.
The only blow that actually made it onto Devimon was Matt's. Even that was a close one. Devimon taunted us when they blocked off most of the attacks. "This is so much fun." Devimon slammed their fist down and make the ground shake a bit. Making Matt fly a bit back.
Before Devimon could raise their hand up, Greymon and Kabuterimon hit Devimon on the chest. Their surprise bought us a couple seconds to do whatever we needed. Sora took advantage of this moment by getting off of Birdramon and running right towards Matt.
She got him up and they both helped get Garurumon up. Matt glanced at Sora and had a tiny bit of a red face. "Thanks Sora for doing that for me. I was worried that I was going to be down for the rest of the fight." Matt told Sora, and Devimon was back to fighting us again.
In a karate style hand attack, they hit it hard on the mountain and shook the ground harder than the other blows did so far. "I have trained in the way of fighting for years before you even went into this digital world. Even your combined amount of times, I still have been going longer."
Devimon kicked the part of the mountain that was behind us and made it start to crumble down. Devimon laughed and was so busy laughing that we all got a chance to attack it. When we all did, Devimon started stepping back surprised that we actually did damage to it. But that was its reason to go at us even harder.
"This is not how I want this to turn out." Devimon started hitting all of us rapidly. Making all of our digimon go back a bit. Sora went to Birdramon and commanded her to attack. Togemon was wrapping Mimi around her fist so she wouldn't get even more hurt. If they were going to try and get more damage at Devimon, the others could to. I could tell this was what most of us were thinking. Since we had gotten up with our partners. Patomon and T.K. were watching all this whole battle in horror. They wanted to help but just couldn't. But something later in this battle would change that one hundred percent.
Then Devimon remembered something that Daemon had told them once. 'The smallest one will be the one that will defeat you in the end. You should kill him first if you plan to win. You can defeat any of the others all you want but it won't matter as long as you don't defeat the smallest one.' Devimon was then looking at T.K. after he heard that voice replay in his head.
"Ha ha ha I found you. The one that I truly need to kill." Devimon said and started to go at T.K. When Matt saw this, he started running at T.K.
"No don't take him. I would rather be the one taken over him." Matt begged and then Devimon looked at Matt. With a smile on their face, they whacked their hand over Matt and forced him to fly back. With Matt landing on the ground Devimon started laughing.
"How much I love to see the pain of those that I fight. The fact that they are so stupid to believe that they can defeat me all on their own. Quit trying to be the big bad hero of this moment. Nobody wants this at all." Devimon tried to teach a lesson to Matt.
Then Devimon looked back at T.K., and then started focusing on him on again. "Now with him out of the way, it is time to go at you a little bit. Who should I attack first, your or your partner?" Devimon seemed to pause for a moment when they said that.
If they attacked T.K. first, then Patomon would die if he was killed. If they attacked Patomon first, then T.K. would be defenseless once it was done. Plus T.K. would feel bad and scared if they went for the partner first. Then Devimon made their choice.
"I can't believe that I actually had to think about my choice. It should obviously be your partner." Devimon grabbed onto Patomon pretty hard and started squeezing it. "I will take this very slow and easy. Makes it even more fun for me to do." Devimon did the squeeze three times when T.K. was starting to get angry about it.
"Let it go!" T.K. screamed and then Devimon slammed their left fish down and made him fly back and hit the wall. Devimon looked like they were very annoyed with the humans acting like they were so much more than they really are worth.
Matt started dragging himself to T.K., and Devimon had no other reaction besides just staring at them. "Can I just get this over with so I can just defeat the rest of you?" Devimon then started beating their fist that had Patomon in it down on the ground multiple times until the point every their own hand was tired.
It was finally after Devimon was done slamming their fist down when T.K.'s digivice started glowing. We all knew enough that this was the indication that T.K.'s partner was now finally going to digivolve. I hoped it was really worth it.
"Patomon digivolve to... ANGEMON!" Patomon yelled, and we were finally revealed what the new digivolution is. It looked exactly like a angel. They had a metal cover on their head and a giant yellow pole with a little bit of grey at the tops and bottom. With some black wrapping on the hands and a bit of blue covering up their private area. Angemon also had blonde hair and the face looked a bit like a human in a way.
"Devimon, you have been here for far too long to try and take over this island. I will finally be here to stop your plans." Angemon said, and all of us looked up at it. Even Devimon seemed just too surprised to do anything. Sora was the first to say anything.
"I wonder if it was because it waited for so long that this was the digivolution. Or if it was going to digivolve to this that it took so long." Sora pretty much captured all of our reactions when she said that.
"That doesn't matter. I just need to kill you now." Devimon was on the verge of screaming. Devimon was about to hold their hand out and attack Angemon when Angemon brought their pole out and was going to attack it.
"Time for this to end." Angemon declared and the pole started turning into a light color and that was nothing else but their attack itself.
The light of the pole went right through Devimon's chest, and expanded on Devimon across the entire body. "What? How is this possible?" Devimon was so confused when their body was dissolving.
"T.K., remember me in the future." Angemon said, and turned back at Devimon. "Your schemes will never happen again. This is a benefit that I will have to face along with my end." Angemon finished, and Devimon said something that worried us all.
"You realize that there are bigger evils aside from me. I am not the only danger that you will be facing. You will face others that are as strong, if not even stronger than myself. Ha ha ha!" Devimon was faded away and then when Devimon was gone, only a tiny bit of Angemon was left.
"T.K., I will be a part of you. Even if you don't realize it. Devimon is right. This is not the last of your trials. You need to prepare yourselves for something worse coming." Angemon put its face up and then fully faded away to. Turning into a egg with one white feather.
T.K. grabbed a hold of it and the sky was turning bright. Seemed like it was day time the whole time, or we were fighting for multiple hours. Which wasn't so unlikely. "I will stay a hold of this egg until I can't anymore. This will make me want to save the dark world even more." T.K. told the egg. Nobody besides me heard the comment about the dark world being saved.
I then remembered what his plans were. When he beat Devimon, he was going to leave to save that place. Starting with Metal City, the capital Daemon was heading. I have no clue what to think of Daemon so far. They seem like a alright digimon, but at the same time they worked for Devimon so I never know.
On other places in File Island, digimon were rejoicing when they saw that Devimon was destroyed. Some even calling the day off from work when they saw the news. Ignitemon looked at the edge of the mountain. "The guy did it actually. Now it's time for their next trial and his journey. I don't know which one I'm wanting to see do well more."
When we were looking out at the bottom of the mountain, everybody was just resting. Some on their digimon. Some just on the ground. Others were standing up. The sun rise was beautiful it was the perfect ending to a long struggle.
That was until there was a fade in. The fade in was of a old man who looked like he could have been in his seventies. I had no clue how he showed up, but it looked like he fully intended to be there. "Hello digidestined. Now we can talk about your next journey."